ICX Section 700 Feature Operation Ver 5

ICX Section 700 Feature Operation Ver 5
Panasonic
a
Technical Manual
Supports ICX Version 5.0
Section 700
Feature
Operation
ICX Version 5.0 (International)
Issued October 2000
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by the Matsushita Communication Industrial Co. Ltd. (MCI). MCI
reserves the right, without notice, to make changes to equipment design as advances in engineering and manufacturing methods warrant.
The software and hardware described in this document may be used or copied only in accordance
with the terms of the license pertaining to said software or hardware.
Reproduction, publication, or duplication of this manual, or any part thereof, in any manner,
mechanically, electronically, or photographically, is prohibited without permission of the Matsushita Communication Industrial Co. Ltd. (MCI).
Copyright 2000 by Matsushita Communication Industrial Co. Ltd. (MCI)
All rights reserved.
Contents
Chapter 1. About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 2. List of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 3. System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
AEC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Call Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Music/MOH Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Building Block Expansion Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Built-In Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Progress Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caller ID Alpha Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrex/PBX Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
24
25
26
27
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
31
31
Class of Service - Trunk/Tie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Extension Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
33
35
35
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Day/Night System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Manual Day/Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Automatic Day/Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Digital Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Inward System Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distinctive Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doorphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
41
42
42
Doorphone Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Extension Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Digital Key Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Device Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP/DTMF SLTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
43
44
44
44
45
iii
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Flexible Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Flexible Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Hunting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Back Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circular Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Next Extension/Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
46
47
47
47
Internal Hold Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCO Tenant Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music-on-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
48
49
49
50
Extension Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Speed Dial Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Network Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Network Attendant Reversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Centralized Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Centralized Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Extension Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Flash Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Transfer Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tandem Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
56
56
56
57
57
57
57
57
58
58
Non-Blocking Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power On Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
58
59
59
Telephone Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
PC-Based Customizing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
QSIG ISDN Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Ringing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDI (DID) Day/Night Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Lamp Field Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slide Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
61
61
62
62
62
62
63
Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Speed Dial TRS (Call Barring) Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Restriction Service (Call Barring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Access Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
65
65
66
67
iv
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Contents
Trunk Interface - DDI (Not Available on UK, TX or EX Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Interface - ISDN-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Interface - Loop Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
67
68
68
Trunk Ringing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
DDI Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Line Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Inward System Access Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
69
69
70
71
Virtual Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Virtual Port used for Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnect Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Priority Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Key ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Transfer Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
72
73
74
74
74
75
Chapter 4. User Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
About User Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Set Absence Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Set Day of Week Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Set Exception Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Set Extension Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Set Message Key ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Set Mode Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Set Personal Speed Dial Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Set Send Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Set Special Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Set System Date/Time/Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Set System Speed Dial Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Set System Speed Dial Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Set System Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Set Text Message Replies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Set Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
v
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Absence Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Repeat Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
125
126
127
128
129
Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
130
131
132
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
134
135
135
136
Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
140
140
141
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Caller ID Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Call Log Operation on a Small Display Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Camp-on (Call Waiting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
151
153
157
Large-Display Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Small-Display Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Changing the Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSS/72 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EM/24 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
ICX (International) issued October 2000
159
161
161
162
162
163
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Contents
Handsfree Answerback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handsfree Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Dial Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
170
170
171
172
172
173
174
DSS/BLF Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
DIL Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
MCO Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Message Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting/Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mute Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Touch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onhook Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
178
179
180
180
181
184
185
186
Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Ringing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Silent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
188
190
192
Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dial Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
194
196
197
Station Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Call (Reset Call). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
204
205
206
Trunk Key Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCO Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCO Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
206
207
207
208
Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Night Answer to Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zip Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
210
210
212
213
214
215
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
vii
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Digital Single Line Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Absence Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Repeat Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
224
225
225
226
227
Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
228
229
230
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
232
233
234
234
Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
236
237
237
238
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Camp-On (Call Waiting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting/Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onhook Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
242
244
245
246
246
247
247
248
249
250
251
251
Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
viii
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Contents
Speed Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Station Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Call (Reset Call). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
261
262
263
Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
MCO Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Universal Night Answer to Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Chapter 7. SLT Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Absence Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
275
276
277
Call Forwarding - All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
278
279
280
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
282
283
284
284
Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Direct Pickup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
287
288
288
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Camp-On (Call Waiting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do-Not-Disturb (DND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
291
293
294
295
ix
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting/Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
296
297
298
299
300
301
Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Speed Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Station Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Call (Reset Call). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
309
309
310
Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
MCO Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Universal Night Answer to Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Appendix A: SBS/VB-9 A-Series Telephone Features. . . . . . . . . . 317
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
x
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Chapter 1. About This Manual
If you are using this manual for a single System, make note of its software version in the following
table. This information may be referenced by technicians or owners of the System.
Software version information for systems shipped with this document
CPC Model:
Software Version:
Organization
This manual contains detailed descriptions of features. The feature descriptions are organized
according to the following categories:
Feature Categories
Description
System Features
System Features are either available on a systemwide basis or aid in the overall administration of the
System.
User Maintenance Features are used by the end user
to maintain the System. These items include setting
time and date, Personal Speed Dial (PSD) numbers
and names, System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers and
names, extension names, Verified ID codes, Call
Forward ID codes for Voice Mail, Message Key ID
codes, Mode schedule, Special Day mode, Exception Day mode, and Day of Week mode.
Key Telephone Features are available to System Key
phones. System Key phones are proprietary digital
sets that provide feature access through a combination of feature keys and access codes.
DSLT Features are available to DSLTs. DSLTs provide digital audio quality and limited feature key
access in a single-line set.
SLT Features are available on a standard analog
push button telephone set. Since SLTs are not
equipped with feature keys, most features are
accessed by using the dialpad and/or the switchhook.
Beginning with Version 4.0, the ICX system can be
used with SBS/A-Series (UK only) and VB-9/ASeries (TW only) telephones. See Appendix A for a
list of differences between ICX key telephone features and those avaibable on the SBS/VB-9, ASeries telephones.
User Maintenance
Key Telephone Features
Digital Single-Line Telephone (DSLT) Features
Single Line Telephone
(SLT) Features
*SBS/A-Series (UK)
and VB-9/A-Series (TW)
Features
* See Appendix A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
11
Chapter 1. About This Manual
Section 700 - Operation
Purpose
The purpose of this manual is to provide an overview of feature operations and requirements. Where
applicable, the following types of information are provided for each feature:
Types of Information
Description
Operation
Hardware Requirements
Related Programming
Considerations
Purpose
Provides an overview of how the feature works and,
in some cases, what it is typically used for
Includes step-by-step instructions on how to use the
feature
Lists any special hardware that is required to use the
feature
Lists the programming subsystems associated with
the feature
Provides details on feature interactions and limitations
Abbreviation List
ACD Automatic Call Distributor
ARS Automatic Route Selection
BGM Background Music
BLF Busy Lamp Field
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
CFWD Call Forward
COS Class of Service
CTAPI Computer Telephony Application Programming Interface
CTI
Computer Telephony Integration
DDI
Direct Dial Inward
DID
Direct Inward Dialing
DIL
Direct In Line
DISA Direct Inward System Access
DL
Direct Line
DN
Directory Number
DND Do-Not-Disturb
DP
Dial Pulse
DSLT Digital Single Line Telephone
DSS Direct Station Selector
DSU Digital Service Unit
DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency
FF
Flexible Function
HD
High Density
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCR Least Cost Routing
MCO Multiple CO (Pooled Trunk Access)
MIS
Management Information System
MOH Music On Hold
PNPDNPhantom Non-Primary Directory Number
PRI
Primary Rate Interface
PSD Personal Speed Dial
SLT
Single Line Telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recorder
SPI
Service Provider Interface
12
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
SSD
TAPI
TRS
ICX-50-700
Chapter 1. About This Manual
System Speed Dial
Telephony Application Programming Interface
Toll Restriction Service
ICX (International) issued October 2000
13
Chapter 1. About This Manual
14
Section 700 - Operation
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Chapter 2. List of Features
This chapter contains the following tables which list the features available with the System:
Table
Page
System Features
16
Maintenance Features
17
Extension Features
18
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
15
Chapter 2. List of Features
Table 1.
Section 700 - Operation
System Features
Topic
16
Page
AEC Disconnect
24
Attendant Groups
24
Automatic Call Distributor
25
Automatic Route Selection
26
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer
27
Background Music/MOH Separation
27
Battery Backup
27
Building Block Expansion Capability
28
Built-In Voice Mail
28
Call Progress Tones
29
Caller ID
29
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
31
Class of Service
31
Data Security
36
Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)
36
Day/Night System Mode
36
Digital Pad
40
Direct Inward System Access
41
Distinctive Ringing
42
Doorphone
42
Extension Interface
43
Flexible Numbering Plan
45
Flexible Slot
46
Hunting Groups
46
Internal Hold Tone
48
MCO Tenant Group
48
Memory Backup
49
Music-on-Hold
49
Name Assignments
50
Network Facilities
56
Non-Blocking Architecture
58
Power Failure Transfer
58
Power On Maintenance
59
Programming Devices
59
QSIG ISDN Lines
60
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 2. List of Features
Topic
Page
Ringing Modes
60
System Speed Dial TRS (Call Barring) Override
65
Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging)
63
Trunk Access Groups
65
Trunk Interface
67
Trunk Ringing Types
68
Virtual Port
71
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)
72
Table 2.
Maintenance Features
Topic
Page
Set Absence Messages
80
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
81
Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
82
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
83
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
84
Set Day of Week Mode
85
Set Exception Day Mode
87
Set Extension Names
89
Set Message Key ID Code
90
Set Mode Schedule
91
Set Personal Speed Dial Names
93
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers
98
Set Send Text Messages
112
Set Special Day Mode
100
Set System Date/Time/Day
107
Set System Speed Dial Index
108
Set System Speed Dial Names
109
Set System Speed Dial Numbers
111
Set Text Message Replies
112
Set Verified Account Codes
113
Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes
115
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
17
Chapter 2. List of Features
Table 3.
Section 700 - Operation
Extension Features
Topic
18
Page
Absence Message
120
Account Codes
122
Attendant Group Calls
124
Auto Repeat Dial
125
Background Music
126
Busy Override
127
Callback Request
128
Call Forwarding
129
Call Hold
133
Call Transfer
142
Caller ID Call Log
144
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
149
Conference Calls
151
Directory Numbers
153
Display Information
157
Do-Not-Disturb
159
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
161
DSS/72 Console
161
EM/24 Console
162
Flash
162
Flexible Function Keys
163
Handsfree Answerback
169
Handsfree Operation
170
Headset Operation
170
Hot Dial Pad
171
Hot Line
172
Intercom Calling
172
Last Number Redial
173
Line Appearances
174
Message Key
177
Message Waiting/Callback
178
Mute Function
179
Offhook Monitor
180
Offhook Signalling
180
Offhook Voice Announce
181
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 2. List of Features
Topic
Page
One-Touch Keys
184
Onhook Dialling
185
Paging
186
Ringing Line Preference
188
Room Monitoring
188
Silent Monitor
190
Speed Dialling
192
Station Lockout
202
Step Call (Reset Call)
204
Timed Reminder Call
205
Trunk Access
206
Trunk Queuing
209
Universal Night Answer to Page
210
Voice Recognition
212
Volume Control
213
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
214
Zip Mode
215
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
19
Chapter 2. List of Features
Section 700 - Operation
This page intentionally left blank.
20
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Chapter 3. System Features
System Features are either available on a system-wide basis or aid in the overall administration of the
System.
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System Features:
Topic
Page
AEC Disconnect
24
Attendant Groups
24
Automatic Call Distributor
25
Automatic Route Selection
26
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer
27
Background Music/MOH Separation
27
Battery Backup
27
Building Block Expansion Capability
28
Built-In Voice Mail
28
Call Progress Tones
29
Caller ID
29
Caller ID Alpha Tagging
30
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
31
Class of Service
31
Class of Service - Trunk/Tie
32
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction
32
Class of Service - Extension Feature
33
Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction
35
Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers
35
Data Security
36
Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) (Summer Time)
36
Day/Night System Mode
36
Manual Day/Night Mode
37
Automatic Day/Night Mode
40
Digital Pad
40
Direct Inward System Access
41
Distinctive Ringing
42
Doorphone
42
Doorphone Sensor
43
Extension Interface
43
Digital Key Telephones
43
Analog Device Capability
44
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
21
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
DP/DTMF SLTs
44
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface
44
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface
45
Flexible Numbering Plan
45
Flexible Slot
46
Hunting Groups
46
Internal Hold Tone
48
MCO Tenant Group
48
Memory Backup
49
Music-on-Hold
49
Name Assignments
50
Extension Name Assignments
50
Speed Dial Name Assignments
54
Network Facilities
22
Page
56
Network Attendant Reversion
56
Network Call Routing
56
Network Call Transfer
56
Network Centralized Voice Mail
57
Network Extension Calling
57
Network Flash Transfer
57
Network Hold
57
Network Paging
57
Network Transfer Recall
58
Tandem Connection
58
Non-Blocking Architecture
58
Power Failure Transfer
58
Power On Maintenance
59
Programming Devices
59
Telephone Programming
59
PC-Based Customizing Tool
60
QSIG ISDN Lines
60
Ringing Modes
60
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing
61
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing
61
DDI (DID) Day/Night Ringing
61
DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing
62
Busy Lamp Field Ringing
62
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Topic
Page
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing
62
Slide Ringing
62
Alarm Ringing
63
Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging)
63
System Speed Dial TRS (Call Barring) Override
65
Trunk Access Groups
66
Trunk Interface
67
Trunk Interface - DDI (Not Available on UK, TX or EX
Model)
67
Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI
67
Trunk Interface - ISDN-PRI
68
Trunk Interface - Loop Start
68
Trunk Ringing Types
68
DDI Ringing
68
Direct Line Ringing
69
DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement
70
Direct Inward System Access Ringing
69
Multiple Ringing
71
Virtual Port
71
Virtual Port used for Floating Hold
71
Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension
71
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)
72
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail
72
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
72
CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code
73
Disconnect Signal
74
High Priority Message Waiting
74
Message Key ID Code
74
Voice Mail Transfer Key
75
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
23
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
AEC Disconnect
Description
This feature allows the System to send a disconnect signal of 1 second to an analog device indicating
that the calling party has hung up (terminated the call). This feature is useful with a Third-party Voice
Mail or an Answering Machine. By default this feature is disabled.
Hardware Requirements
•
AEC port
Considerations
•
The 1 second time duration of the disconnect signal is fixed. (It cannot be changed.)
Attendant Groups
Description
An attendant phone is often used as a central answering point for other extensions. In addition,
attendant phones frequently have special capabilities for monitoring and programming extensions.
You can reach the assigned attendant group by dialling the feature access code for Attendant Calls
(usually 0). If an attendant phone is available but does not answer within a set time, the call will move
to the next available attendant phone. If all members of the attendant group are busy for a specified
time, the call can be forwarded to other extensions or another hunt group. The system allows up to 20
extensions to be included in an attendant group.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
24
The System allows one attendant group for each system mode (Day 1, Day 2, and Night).
An attendant group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions. If virtual, several
phones can be made to ring at the same time.
Attendant groups can use only Pilot Terminal Hunt Group or Pilot Distributed Hunt Group. For
more information, see “Hunting Groups” on page 46.
The pilot number for an attendant group is flexible (i.e., any extension number can be designated
as the pilot [not a real extension]).
If a member of the attendant group has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) or Call Forwarding - All set, that
phone is temporarily removed from the attendant group.
If a member of the attendant group has Call Forwarding - Busy set and the extension is busy, the
call goes to the next phone in the attendant group.
If all members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer, the call can be forwarded to
another hunt group or another extension.
Attendant groups support the following call types:
• CLI (Called Line Identification) / Direct Dial Inward (DDI)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Extension calls
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
• Private network attendant calls
• Call reversion
• Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group
Automatic Call Distributor
Description
The System provides an optional Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) for efficient presentation,
handling, and management of incoming calls to one or more groups of specialized users.
This optional Built-in ACD is contained on a single circuit card that is installed in the System. This
“built-in” capability eliminates the need for custom wiring and other installation.
Each specialized user is known as an ACD agent. Each agent position is equipped with a large display
telephone (VB-44225/VB-D411LDSUK) that provides Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) messages to
assist the agent in handling calls.
The Built-in ACD provides:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ICX-50-700
Up to 3 agent groups (ACD Version 3.0 and higher)
Up to 2 agent groups (ACD Version below 3.0)
Up to 32 agent IDs per group
Up to 64 agent IDs per system (ACD Version 2.0 and higher)
Up to 32 agents
Up to 6 supervisor IDs per system (ACD Version 3.0 and higher)
Up to 2 supervisor IDs per system (ACD Version below 3.0)
Up to 4 voice ports per group
Up to 4 voice ports per system
1 Music-On-Hold (MOH) source (Main System MOH source)
1 Management Information System (MIS) Monitor Port (RS-232C)
Abandoned Call Report counter available with MIS reports (This is not the same as the
Abandoned Call Timer added to the Station Message Detail Recorder [SMDR] reports.)
2-week memory for MIS reports
Up to 6 recorded messages (flexible length, max. 96 sec. per system) (ACD Version 3.0 and
higher)
In Version 4.0 and higher, the Silent Monitor feature has been added. This feature allows an
ACD supervisor to monitor a call between an ACD agent and a caller without the knowledge
of either party. For more information, See “Silent Monitor” on page 190, Section 400 Programming, and Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.
In addition to MOH, ACD Version 4.0 provides up to eight analog extension ports that can be
connected to a recorded announcement device. See Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference
Manual.
Up to 6 recorded messages (max. 14 sec. per message) (ACD Version below 3.0)
Zip Tone which automatically answers calls when an agent is using the Headset mode (CPC
Version 3.5 and higher)
Wrap Mode which allows an agent to complete any paperwork before becoming available to
take another call. (CPC Version 3.5 and higher)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
25
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
See Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.
Considerations
•
For more information, see Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.
Automatic Route Selection
Description
When Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is enabled, the system follows a preselected route for calls.
Usually the selected routing is the least cost route.
ARS works in conjunction with Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring). Calls can be denied
based on the programmed TRS (Call Barring) level for the originating party. (For more information,
see “Ringing Modes” on page 60.)
•
Three levels of ARS checking are available based on the dialled number following the ARS
access code:
•
Direct Route Selection: The simplest form of ARS routing that upon ARS entry
(enter 9) directly selects a trunk group and any dialled number modification.
•
Route List Selection: A more complex routing that includes up to 5 alternative
levels of route selection and includes TRS (Call Barring) level checking.
•
Time List Selection: The most complex routing that determines the appropriate
route list based upon the day and time.
•
Forced ARS is available on an Extension Class of Service (COS) basis.
•
A special day list provides tailored ARS routing for up to 20 holidays, vacation days, etc.
•
Automatic modification of dialled numbers is available. This includes deleting up to 24 prefix
digits and adding up to a 10-digit prefix and a 10-digit suffix. The modification of dialled
numbers can include pauses, Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) conversion, itemized code
(extension number) and an authorization code. (Itemized code and authorization are not used
in some areas.)
•
Up to 8 authorization codes are available.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
26
N/A
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer
Description
The System can be set to automatically transfer trunk calls out to another trunk without requiring the
call to be answered internally. This transfer may be either trunk based or extension based (i.e., call
forward outside).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Background Music/MOH Separation
Description
Separate inputs are provided for Background Music and Music-on-Hold (MOH). This allows one
music or sound source to be used for background music and another music or sound source to be used
for music on hold.
A typical advantage of this is playing a pre-recorded promotional tape to held parties (since many
may be customers) while providing a selected background music for use in the office.
Hardware Requirements
•
Background music requires an SCC card (VB-44181).
•
Both Background Music and Music on Hold (if using external MOH) require a sound source.
Considerations
•
N/A
Battery Backup
Description
When backup batteries are installed, the System will continue to operate in the event of a power
failure. If using Battery Backup, backup batteries must be installed in each CCU.
A fully loaded System will operate at least 30 minutes on backup batteries for the ICX.
Hardware Requirements
•
Back-up battery unit (VB-44025)
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
27
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
Any device connected to the System but that does not derive its power from the System must
have a backup power source to operate. These devices include any System Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) printer (or recorder), fax machine, answering machine,
modem, cordless telephone, etc.
Building Block Expansion Capability
Description
The System is designed to support easy expansion. Each CCU in the System supports 96 ports (12
flexible slots) as well as 2 option slots. Up to 6 CCUs may be installed in the System for a total of 576
ports.
Up to 2 expansion CCUs may be connected to a base CCU. When a fourth CCU is required, another
base CCU is installed. Up to 2 expansion CCUs may be connected to the second base CCU.
This building block approach allows you to easily add equipment when needed without a major
interruption in service or a major delay.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
In addition to the additional CCUs and related CCU hardware/cabling required for expansion,
when the System is expanded the CPC card and/or TSW cards may need to be upgraded as well.
The CPC96 supports up to 96 ports. The CPC288 supports up to 288 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW288. The CPC-576 supports up to 576 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW576.
Built-In Voice Mail
Description
The System supports the Built-in Voice Mail. This unit assists in providing reliable, effective
communications. This is a simple device that includes an automated attendant function and can be
used to record conversations (where permitted).
The Built-in Voice Mail is easy to install. It is installed in a CCU card slot and no cabling is required.
Some of the major features include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
28
Automated attendant
Automatic recording for incoming and outgoing calls
One-touch mail box transfer
Mail box status display (Key Light Emitting Diode [LED] on digital telephone)
Mail box grouping
2-way recording
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 3. System Features
Outside notification
Date/time stamp
Integrated Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) control (with large LCD telephone)
Message light control
Up to 254 mail boxes
Up to 40 hours of message storage time
Up to 16 voice ports
For more information, see the System Built-In Voice Mail With Two-way Recording Reference
Manual.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Progress Tones
Description
The System supplies a full array of call progress tones. These tones provide audible indications of the
status of calls and include dial tone, busy tone, ringback tone, error tone, confirmation tone, and
splash tone. The complete specification for these tones may be found in Section 300 - Installation.
In addition to call progress tones, Direct Station Select (DSS) Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and the
display provide additional indication of the status of calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Caller ID
Description
(Note: Analog Caller ID is not available in the UK model).
A properly equipped system supports Caller ID, a service offered by the network telephone service
provider. The Exchange sends calling number information to the system after the first ring. Users with
display telephones can see Caller ID information as incoming calls ring at their extension. They can
also access previous calls via the Caller ID Call Log feature. The Caller ID number is recorded in Call
Logging.
Prior to Version 4.0, the system would not display Caller ID information for an extension that was in
use when a call was received. In Version 4.0 or higher, Caller ID information is displayed on the
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
29
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
second line of an LCD display when an incoming call is received during conversation. If the second
incoming call is from another extension, the LCD displays the extension name or number.
Hardware Requirements
•
Loop-start exchange line card (8) (VB-44510UK) with Caller ID circuit card (8) (VB-44513UK),
Loop-start exchange line card (4) (VB-44514UK) with Caller ID circuit card (4) (VB-44515UK),
ISDN (PRI = VB-44540UK, BRI = VB-44530UK).
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF2-0: Caller ID
FF2-0: Caller ID Ring Control
FF3-0: Call Duration Display
FF1-0-01: Alpha Tagging (Name/No. Display)
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ISDN (PRI/BRI - T Point) can get calling party information.
Caller ID service must be ordered from the local telephone operating company or the
interexchange carrier.
Caller ID data is usually sent between the first and the second rings of the incoming trunk call.
The trunk may be programmed to immediately ring at the station or wait until after the Caller ID
digits are received before ringing at the station. If the trunk is programmed to ring immediately,
the Caller ID digits will not display until after they are received and processed.
Caller ID numbers may be denied from being sent for some callers (private). Some long distance
carriers may not provide Caller ID data (out of area).
Caller ID only support the single format (number only). Multiple format (number and name) is
not supported.
Prior to Version 4.0, Caller ID supported only the number format. Version 4.0 and higher
supports selection of the number or name.
In Version 4.0, Caller ID displays the highest ringing priority call (call queued to ring at the
target extension immediately after the present call terminates).
Caller ID Alpha Tagging
CPC-96, CPC-288, and CPC-576 Version 3.0
Description
If the received Caller ID phone number matches any number in the System Speed Dials (SSD)
(SSD000-SSD199), then the associated SSD name can be displayed as the Caller ID information
instead of the Caller ID phone number. Alternatively, the Direct Dial Inward (DDI) name may be
displayed instead.
In Version 4.0 and higher, Caller ID information will be shown on the second line of the LCD display
when an incoming call rings a display phone with a conversation already in progress. Second
incoming calls include extension Camp-on, extension Call Wait, queued DIL, both Appearance and
non-Appearance calls (Exchange Line, MCO, virtual or DN, recall, BLF).
Hardware Requirements
•
30
Loop-start trunk card (VB-44510 or VB44514)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
Chapter 3. System Features
Caller ID circuit card (VB-44513 or VB-44515)
ISDN (PRI = VB-44540UK, BRI = VB-44530UK)
Considerations
•
The system may be set to display Caller ID in one of two priorities as follows:
Priority Choice 1
• CID name (future feature)
• Alpha tagging if matched
• DDI name
•
•
Priority Choice 2
• DDI name
• CID name (future feature)
• Alpha tagging if matched
Currently Caller ID only supports the single format (number only). Multiple format (number and
name) is not currently available but is planned as a future feature.
Caller ID Call Logging only shows the CID number.
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
Description
Centrex/PBX Compatibility allows the System to be connected behind centrex or PBX lines.
The System supports up to 6 access codes for dialling centrex or a PBX. These access codes allow the
System, System Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) output to exclude the number
dialled to reach a centrex or PBX line.
When connected behind a PBX or Centrex, Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) can be used
to restrict calls.
The System also supports transmission of a flash signal over the centrex or PBX link.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service
Description
A Class of Service (COS) allows or restricts access to a group of features or functions. For instance,
an Extension COS may allow Call Forwarding features. In the System, both extensions and trunks use
classes of service.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
31
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
The System supports the following COSs for trunks and extensions:
•
COS - Trunk/Tie
•
COS - Ext/Ext Restriction
•
COS - Extension Feature
•
COS - Trunk to Trunk Restriction
Class of Service - Trunk/Tie
Tie/Trunk COS allows or restricts access to various features. Each trunk is assigned to one of 16 trunk
classes of service (00-15).
The following table shows the features that can be enabled/disabled for each trunk COS.
Table 4.
Trunk COS
Number
Feature
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Intercom Ringing Tone (trunk or intercom ring tone)
Dial Tone to Tie Lines (Enable/Disable)
Forced Recover on Fast-Busy Tone (Send fast busy or disconnect line)
DDI Dialled Number Conversion Table (DDI/CLI Table A or B)
Paging on DISA/Tie-Line Call (Allow/Restrict)
DISA Security Code Verification
Network Flash Forwarding (Version 3.5 and higher)
Network Flash Receive (Version 3.5 and higher)
Brokers Hold for Network Calls (Version 3.5 and higher)
Priority Message-Waiting Set/Cancel (Version 3.5 and higher)
Network-to-Network Transfer (Version 3.5 and higher)
Camp-On for Tie-Lines (Version 3.5 and higher)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction
Ext/Ext Restriction COS allows or restricts calls placed to other extensions based upon the Extension
COS. Each Extension COS is programmed to either originate or not originate calls to another
Extension COS.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
32
N/A
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Class of Service - Extension Feature
Extension COS allows or restricts access to certain extension features. (The extension features are
described later in this manual.) Each extension is assigned to one of 16 classes of service (00-15).
The following table shows the features that can be enabled/disabled for each Extension COS.
Table 5.
Extension COS
Class of Service Features
Number
ICX-50-700
Feature
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Intercom Call Type (Tone/Voice)
Onhook Transfer at Ringback (Allow/Restrict)
Onhook Transfer at Talk (Allow/Restrict)
On-Hook Transfer at Camp-On (Allow/Restrict)
Exclusive Hold for Non-Appearing trunk (System/Exclusive)
Exclusive Hold on SLTs (System/Exclusive)
Brokers Hold on SLTs (3-Party Conference/Brokers)
Hookflash During Talk on SLTs (Allow/Restrict)
SSD Assignment (Allow/Restrict)
SSD Assignment to MCO Tenant Groups (Allow/Restrict)
SSD Dialling (Allow/Restrict)
Intercom Redialing (Allow/Restrict)
14
MCO Incoming Call Answer (Allow/Restrict)
15
Paging (Allow/Restrict)
16
Auto Repeat Dial (Allow/Restrict)
17
DND Set/Clear (Allow/Restrict)
18
DND Set/Clear (Other) (Allow/Restrict)
19
Call Forward/All Calls (Allow/Restrict)
20
Call Forward/No Answer (Allow/Restrict)
21
Call Forward-Busy (Allow/Restrict)
22
Call Forward (Other) (Allow/Restrict)
23
User Maintenance Log-in (Allow/Restrict)
24
Priority Message Waiting Send (VM) (Allow/Restrict)
25
Message Waiting Send (Allow/Restrict)
26
System Mode Switch (Allow/Restrict)
27
Busy Override Send (Allow/Restrict)
28
Manual Camp-On Send (Allow/Restrict)
29
Manual Camp-On Receive (Allow/Restrict)
30
Callback Request Send (Allow/Restrict)
Direct Trunk Access (Allow/Restrict)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
33
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Class of Service Features
31
Callback Request Receive (Allow/Restrict)
32
Trunk Queuing (Allow/Restrict)
33
Manual DND Override Send (Allow/Restrict)
34
Forced DND Override (Allow/Restrict)
35
8-Party Conference (Allow/Restrict)
36
Voice Call Send (Allow/Restrict)
37
Voice Call Receive (Allow/Restrict)
38
Dial Tone Stop (Allow/Restrict)
39
Dial Tone Pre-Pause Check (Check/No check)
40
Long Talk Alarm for Outgoing trunk Calls (Enable/Disable)
41
Recall Timer Apply (Recall to Extension/Recall to Attendant)
42
Forced ARS (Not Forced/Forced)
43
API Event Reporting (No/Yes)
44
Call Forward/Outside (Allow/Deny)
45
Onhook Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Allow/Deny)
46
Station Call Park Answer (Allow/Deny)
47
Station Call Park Transfer (Allow/Deny)
48
OHVA (Allow/Deny)
49
OHVA Answer (Allow/Deny)
50
Call-Waiting Answer at HOLD
51
On-Hook Transfer with Floating Hold
52-54
34
Not Used
55
Station Lockout (Own)
56
Station Lockout (Other)
57
Absence Message Set
58
UNA Pickup
59
Intercom Ring Tone at Trunk (Version 3.5 and higher)
60
BGM Access
61
CFD Setting For a PDN By Pressing the NPDN
62
Busy Override
63
Silent Monitor Initiate
64
Silent Monitor Receive
65
Recall Pickup
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction
Trunk to Trunk COS allows or restricts call transfers from one trunk to another trunk based on the
originating and receiving trunk COS.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers
CPC-96, CPC-288, and CPC-576 Version 3.0
Prior to CPC Version 3.0, timers related to certain extension functions such as the Hold Recall Timer
were only available on a system-wide basis. Beginning with CPC Version 3.0 these extension
functions may continue to use the same system-wide timers or a newly added Station Timer Class
settings. Up to eight Station Timer Classes may be specified. Then an extension may be assigned a
Station Timer Class.
The following table shows the extension timers that may be assigned on a class basis.
Table 6.
Station Timer Class
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Station Timer
Hold Recall Timer (KTEL)
Hold Recall Timer (SLT)
Transfer Recall Timer (KTEL and SLT)
Hold/Transfer Recall Ringing Timer
Call Park Recall Timer
Call Forward No Answer Timer (Day 1)
Call Forward No Answer Timer (Day 2)
Call Forward No Answer Timer (Night)
Floating Hold Recall Timer
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
35
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Data Security
Description
If you are using a line for data (modem connections, etc.), Data Security makes it possible to prevent
interruptions. Data Security can be implemented for either all phone use or outside line use.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)
Description
The Daylight Saving Time feature allows you to program the 576 so that it automatically adjusts the
system’s internal timeclock forward or back on specific days of the year. This time change is then
reflected on the phone’s display (Key Telephone only).
Depending on the day of the year, the system will set the time according to the following:
Day of the year
Third Sunday in March
Last Sunday in October
System Action
System clock adds one hour to current time at 2 a.m.
System clock subtracts one hour from current time at 2 a.m.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Daylight Saving Time can only be enabled or disabled in system programming. See Section 400:
Programming for more information.
Day/Night System Mode
Description
Day/Night System Mode enables you to switch the System between two Day modes and a Night
mode. These modes determine incoming call handling, Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring)
call handling, and attendant group support.
36
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
While in a Night mode (generally used at night or any time when your office is closed), incoming
calls can ring at selected extensions (e.g., a night watchman’s extension or an extension connected to
an answering machine). Outbound calls can be restricted to certain phones. Calls can be directed to a
night-time attendant group instead of the normal daytime attendant group.
The System provides one Night mode for night call handling. However, there are three night feature
access codes (Night, Night 1, and Night 2). These three codes may be used to provide different twoway Voice Mail messages (i.e., Night may select one message, Night 1 may select a different
message, and Night 2 may select a third message.)
Typically, the Day mode is used for normal call processing of outside calls, TRS (Call Barring) calls,
and attendant calls. The second day mode (Day 2) may be used for alternative call handling such as
during a lunch break, etc.
There are two ways to change day/night service modes:
•
•
Manually
Automatically
The following table lists the impact on TRS (Call Barring), Ringing, Attendant, and Built-in Voice
Mail in the various system modes:
Table 7.
System Mode Impact on TRS (Call Barring), Ringing, Attendant, and Built-in Voice Mail
SYSTEM
MODE
TRS (Call Barring)
RING
ATTENDANT
BUILT-IN
VOICE MAIL
Day 1
Day TRS Mode
Day 1 Ring Pattern
Day 1 Attend. Group
Day 1 Message
Day 2
Day TRS Mode
(Same for Day 1 and
Day 2)
Day 2 Ring Pattern
Day 2 Attend. Group
Handling
Day 2 Message
Night
Night TRS Mode
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Ring Pattern
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Attend. Group
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Message
Night 1
Night TRS Mode
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Ring Pattern
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Attend. Group
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night 1 Message
Night 2
Night TRS Mode
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Ring Pattern
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Attend. Group
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night 2 Message
Manual Day/Night Mode
You can manually change the System mode to Day 1, Day 2, Night, Night 2, or Night 3 mode by
either entering the correct dial code or by pressing the appropriately programmed FF key.
When using manual mode, the System may be configured to either use MCO tenant Day/Night modes
or system-wide Day/Night mode.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
37
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To switch Day 1/Day 2/Night modes using Feature Access Codes (Versions prior to
3.0):
Switch Mode
Toggle Day 1,
Day 2 and Night
Modes
Procedure
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Indication
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 760 (UK/HK) or 760# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
If changing to Night mode, Red LED lights
If changing to Day mode, Red LED goes off
Day 2 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 761 (UK/HK) or 761# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the
Day 2 Feature code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Green LED lights
Night 1 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 762 (UK/HK) or 762# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)for the
Night 1 Feature code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED lights
Night 2 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 763 (UK/HK) or 763# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the
Night 2 Feature code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED lights
38
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
To switch Day 1/Day 2/Night modes using Feature Access Codes (Version 3.0 and
later):
Switch Mode
Toggle Day 1,
Day 2 and Night
Modes
Procedure
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Indication
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 760 (UK/HK) or 760# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
If changing to Day 2 mode, Green LED lights
If changing to Night mode, Red LED lights
If changing to Day 1mode, LED goes off
Day 2 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 761 (UK/HK) or 761# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the
Day 2 Feature code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Green LED lights
Night 1 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 762 (UK/HK) or 762# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the
Night 1 Feature code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED lights
Night 2 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 763 (UK/HK) or 763# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the
Night 2 Feature code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED lights
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Day and Night modes can be assigned to FF keys on a phone. You can switch between Day 1,
Day 2, Night, Night 1, and Night 2 modes simply by pressing the appropriate key. The FF key
lights red when the System is in the assigned mode. Alternatively a Day/Night toggle mode key
can be assigned. Pressing the key toggles between modes. When in Day mode, the FF key LED
is not lit. When in Night mode, the LED lights red.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
39
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
With CPC 3.0 and later - Day 1/Day 2/Night toggle mode key can be assigned. Pressing the key
toggles between modes. When in Day 1 mode, the FF key LED is not lit. When in Day 2 mode,
the LED lights green. When in Night mode, the LED lights red.
•
Prior to CPC 3.0 - Day/Night toggle mode key can be assigned. Pressing the key toggles between
modes. When in Day mode, the FF key LED is not lit. When in Night mode, the LED lights red.
Automatic Day/Night Mode
You can set the System to automatically enter a particular Day/Night mode determined by the time of
day. Each day of the month can be assigned 1 of 3 automatic system mode patterns. Each of the
patterns can be set to change modes up to 5 times per day.
Up to 20 special days can be programmed with up to 5 automatic mode changes for the day.
An Exception Day period is available for overriding the automatic mode for extended periods of time.
For instance, if an office is shut down for the week of July Fourth, the System can be programmed to
not operate in the automatic mode for those days. The System will stay in the same mode for the
period. The mode may be manually changed at any time.
For instance, the System can be set to automatically enter Day 1 mode at 8:00 a.m. on weekdays and
enter Night mode at 5:00 p.m. on weekdays. All incoming calls, TRS (Call Barring) and attendant
group handling would change accordingly. On Saturday and Sunday, the System would stay in Night
mode.
The Automatic Day/Night modes may be set in User Maintenance. See “Set Mode Schedule” on page
91, “Set Special Day Mode” on page 100, “Set Exception Day Mode” on page 87, and “Set Day of
Week Mode” on page 85.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
You can only set Automatic Day/Night modes on a system-wide basis. If tenant groups require
separate Day/Night modes, you must set these modes manually.
•
You can manually override Automatic Day/Night modes. (See “Manual Day/Night Mode” on
page 37.)
Digital Pad
Description
Digital pad settings allow adjustment of call levels for different call types. There are 29 pad classes in
the System. For pad class, a volume adjustment is assigned for a connection to any pad class
assignment. The volume adjustment is between -30dB and +30 dB.
There are 8 extension pad classes and 16 trunk pad classes. In addition, there are pad classes for
conference calls, page port, MFR, RAI Modem, and Conference Call Unit. One pad class is currently
not used.
For instance, a call from an extension assigned to extension pad class 1 to a trunk assigned to trunk
pad class 3 would received the volume adjustment assigned to this connection combination.
40
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Direct Inward System Access
(All Versions)
Description
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) gives off-site users dial-in access to the System. You access
DISA from an outside location by entering a digit number assigned to a DISA trunk.
For security reasons, sixteen incoming DISA ID codes/Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring)
class can be assigned. If a code is assigned, it must be entered as soon as the DISA trunk answers.
Operation
To make a DISA call to an extension:
Action
1. From an outside location, enter the DISA trunk number.
Result
DISA dial tone
2. If an incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code
(up to 10 digits). Otherwise, proceed to step 3.
3. Dial the extension number.
To make a DISA call to an outside number:
Action
1. From an outside location, enter the DISA trunk number.
Result
DISA dial tone
2. If an incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code
(up to 10 digits). Otherwise, proceed to step 3.
3. Enter the trunk group number (9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Indonesia, Malaysia], or 81-84)
4. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
• N/A
Considerations
•
•
Busy override cannot be used for a DISA line.
DISA can be used to access extensions as well as outside numbers.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
41
Chapter 3. System Features
•
•
Section 700 - Operation
Paging cannot be accessed from a DISA line.
While dialling an extension number, the * key may be entered to cancel dialling and return to dial
tone. The # key may be entered to disconnect.
Distinctive Ringing
Description
Distinctive Ringing sets trunk calls to ring with a distinctive ring based on the trunk. This “ring” also
identifies the call as an outside call instead of an inside call.
Beginning with CPC Version 3.0, calls to a key telephone or Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT)
can also be set to Distinctive Ringing on an extension basis.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Doorphone
Description
The doorphone allows visitors to announce their presence from the office door, etc. When the button
on the doorphone is pressed, one or more phones ring in the System. When answered, a two way
conversation is made between the doorphone and the answering phone.
The answering party can operate a connected door opener (if equipped).
Operation
To answer a doorphone:
Action
Result
1. Answer the doorphone. (Door box calls ring in on a dedicated FF key.)
Two way conversation possible
2. Enter 3 while connected to the doorphone extension.
Door unlocks
Hardware Requirements
•
•
•
42
The doorphone requires a Doorphone Adaptor, Doorphone, and Door Opener. Door openers are
not sold by Panasonic; however, they can be purchased from an electronics dealer.
Up to 2 Doorphones can be connected to a Doorphone Adaptor and utilize the same trunk.
The Door Opener can be set to open for 15 seconds, 30 seconds, or one minute.
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 3. System Features
While the Door Opener is functioning, a call from another Doorphone on the same Doorphone
Adaptor cannot be answered.
Considerations
•
The trunk connected to the Doorphone Adaptor must be set to dial pulse (DP).
Doorphone Sensor
The sensor is a device that detects when a circuit is opened or closed. Sensors can be used to detect
events such as the opening of windows or doors. When the sensor is tripped, a tone sounds at a
designated extension. Sensors are not sold by Panasonic; however, they can be purchased separately
from an electronics dealer.
Hardware Requirements
•
•
The sensor is attached to the Doorphone Adaptor (VB-3473UK).
Trunks connected to the Doorphone Adaptor signal the designated extension when the sensor is
tripped.
Considerations
•
The trunk connected to the sensor must be a dial-pulse (DP) trunk.
Extension Interface
The System supports a full array of extension devices including the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Panasonic’s proprietary key telephones
Standard analog devices
Dial Pulse (DP) / Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Single Line Telephone (SLT)
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Basic Rate Interface (BRI) S-point devices
ISDN-Primary Rate Interface (PRI) S-point devices
Digital Key Telephones
The System supports the complete line of Panasonic proprietary Digital Key Telephones. These
models include:
U.K.
• 12 key-Standard
VB-D411UK or
VB-D411UKB
• 12 key-Speakerphone
Others
VB-44220
VB-44221
• 12 key-Display Speakerphone
VB-D411DSUK or
VB-D411DSUKB
VB-44223
• 12 key-Large Display Speakerphone
VB-D411LDSUK or
VB-D411DSUKB
VB-44225
• 12 key-Soft key Display Speakerphone
VB-D411DSVUK
VB-44224
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
43
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
U.K.
Others
• 24 key-Display
VB-D611DUK
• 24 key-Display Speakerphone
VB-D611DSUK or
VB-D611DSUKB
VB-44233
• EM24-24 key Expansion Module
VB-D331UK
VB-44310
• DSS-72 key DSS/BLF
VB-D631UK
VB-44320
UK/Indonesia/Malaysia:In addition to the above digital key telephone module, the System
supports the complete of the ICX proprietary VB-3411/3611 series
telephones and VB-3011 Digital SLT.
HK/Taiwan: The former ICX proprietary telephones are not available to connect to ICX systems
without modification. Please consult your dealer.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
VB-44220 is not available in Hong Kong.
VB-44221 is not available in Taiwan, Malaysia, and Indonesia.
Analog Device Capability
The System supports analog telephone devices. These devices include fax machines, answering
machines, cordless telephones, computer modems as well as standard rotary and push button
telephones. This provides full flexibility in configuring the System.
Hardware Requirements
•
Analog devices must be connected to an analog port.
Considerations
•
N/A
DP/DTMF SLTs
The System supports both DP (rotary dial) and DTMF (push button) analog extension types.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The CPC card provides 4 DTMF receivers. Traffic levels may require that one or more MFR
(DTMF) circuit cards be installed. Each MFR card provides 8 DTMF decoders.
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface
The System supports ISDN-BRI terminal devices for connection as extensions. The BRI provides 2 B
(bearer) plus 1 D (data) channel support (2B +D; 144kbps or 192 kbps).
44
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface
UK/Malaysia/Indonesia: The System supports Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Primary
Rate Interface (PRI) terminal equipment with the ISDN/PRI S Point Interface (VB-44540UK).
The primary rate interface provides 30B (bearer) plus one D (data) channel support (30B +D;
1984kbps).
On the ICX, either 8 or 30 circuits may be enabled on the interface. Each enabled group of 8
circuits requires a slot position in the System. Fully used cards occupy four slot positions for the
ICX.
HK/Taiwan: The System supports ISDN-PRI terminal equipment with the ISDN/PRI S Point
Interface (VB-44540). The PRI provides 23 B (bearer) plus 1 D (data) channel support (23B + D;
1544 kbps).
On the ICX, either 8 or 30 circuits may be enabled on the interface. Each enabled group of 8
circuits requires a slot position in the System. Fully used cards occupy four slot positions for the
ICX.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Flexible Numbering Plan
Description
The System provides flexible numbering for feature access special numbers and extension numbers.
The dialling plan allows settings for digits dialled at dial tone, digits dialled at ringback tone, digits
dialled at busy tone, two patterns of feature codes dialled at dial tone, two patterns of feature codes
dialled at ringback tone, and two patterns of feature codes dialled at busy tone.
Feature access codes can be used when replacing another PBX system with an ICX or S-ICX system.
Rather than learning the new access codes, the System feature access codes can be changed to match
the old system. As a result, telephone users are less confused by the change and the requirement for
retraining is reduced. Two sets of feature access codes are available (one of the two must be assigned
to the terminal).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
45
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Flexible Slot
Description
Each CCU in the ICX system contains 12 flexible (universal) slots. These slots can be used for trunk
cards, extension cards, or certain option cards.
Some circuit cards such as the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Primary Rate Interface
(PRI) card occupy more that one slot.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Hunting Groups
Description
Hunting allows calls to be automatically transferred among a preselected group of phones. If a phone
is busy or there is no answer in a set amount of time, the call will hunt to the next phone in the hunt
group.
A phone assigned to a hunt group is called a member. Up to 20 members can be assigned to a hunt
group. Up to 12 hunt groups are available per CCU.
Several methods of station hunting are available. Some methods require use of a pilot number (a
fictitious extension number) while others start by a direct call to a hunt group member.
The System supports the following hunting groups:
•
•
•
•
•
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group
Switch Back Hunt Group
Circular Hunt Group
Next Extension/Hunt Group
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number. The System begins with the first member
and hunts through the group for the first available member to receive the call. If no member is
available (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued
for the first member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer to specify how long the
System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that the same hunting order is taken for all calls. This is
useful in presenting calls to selected members first.
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number. The System reviews who received the
last call and begins hunting with the next member. If the last member in the group is reached and no
46
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
member is available, the hunt continues with the first member and proceeds forward. After a complete
search and no available member is found (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified
amount of time), the call is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the
Queuing Timer and specify how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before
beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls are evenly distributed throughout the group.
Switch Back Hunt Group
Switch Back Hunt Group initiates hunting in a specified group for calls made to a member extension
in the group. If the called member of the hunt group is busy, the System begins hunting forward to the
end of the group. If no member is available, the system hunts backward from the called member. If no
member is available (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call
is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify
how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt
group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed to start with a selected portion
of the hunting group based on the directed number. However, all members are eventually searched.
Circular Hunt Group
Circular Hunt Group initiates hunting in a specified group for calls made to a member extension in the
group. If the called member of the hunt group is busy, the System begins hunting forward to the end of
the group and then moves forward from the first member of the group. If no member is available
(extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued for the first
member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify how the long the
System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed to start with a selected portion
of the hunting group based on the directed number. However, all members are eventually searched.
Next Extension/Hunt Group
Next Extension/Hunt Group lets you specify which extension or hunt group to search after the
Queuing Timer expires. This hunt group can be set as any type of hunt group, an attendant group, or
an extension (including virtual extensions).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
If a member of the hunt group has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) or Call Forwarding - All set, that
phone is temporarily removed from the hunt group.
If a member of the hunt group has Call Forwarding - Busy set and the extension is busy, the call
goes to the next phone in the hunt group.
If all members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer, the call can be forwarded to
another hunt group or another extension.
A hunt group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions. If virtual, several phones
can be made to ring at the same time.
The pilot number for a hunt group is flexible (i.e., any extension number can be designated as the
pilot [not a real extension]).
Hunt groups support the following call types:
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
47
Chapter 3. System Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Section 700 - Operation
CLI (Called Line Identification) / Direct Dial Inward (DDI)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Extension calls
Private network attendant calls
Call forward incoming
Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group
For Version 4.0 and higher, a queuing wait timer allows you to queue calls in a Hunt
Group for a fixed period of time. When the call has passed through the Hunt Group
once, the timer is activated and the call is re-routed to the top of the group. The system
continues to hunt for an available agent until the timer limit expires, and the call is
diverted to another location.
Internal Hold Tone
Description
If a Music-on-Hold (MOH) sound source is unavailable, a periodic hold tone generated internally in
the System can be provided to a caller. For more information, see “Music-on-Hold” on page 49.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Tenant Group
Description
When the System is configured for tenant operation, MCO Tenant Group determines which trunk
groups are used for incoming and outgoing calls.
Each MCO trunk group is assigned to an MCO tenant group for incoming calls and for outgoing calls.
By default, Trunk Group 1 is assigned to MCO Tenant Group 1, Trunk Group 2 is assigned to MCO
Tenant Group 2, etc. for both incoming and outgoing calls.
For outgoing calls, each tenant group has 5 auto-trunk selections available. By default the first autotrunk selection is seized by entering 9, the second by entering 81, etc.
The number of MCO tenant groups available depends on the number of ports in the system as follows:
•
48
ICX:
• 96-port system: 1 to 12 MCO tenant groups
• 192-port system:1 to 24 MCO tenant groups
• 288-port system:1 to 36 MCO tenant groups
• 384-port system:1 to 48 MCO tenant groups
• 480-port system:1 to 60 MCO tenant groups
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 3. System Features
576-port system:1 to 72 MCO tenant groups
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
When you first assign a trunk to Trunk Tenant Group from the initial setting of (0), the system
automatically assigns the trunks as a member of the same number MCO Trunk Group (FF5-2 and
FF5-3). For instance, if Trunk 10 is assigned as a member of Trunk Tenant Group 1, then Trunk
10 is automatically assigned as a member of MCO Outbound Trunk Group 1 and MCO Inbound
Trunk Group 1. These assignments can be manually changed if desired.
Memory Backup
Description
Data stored in the CPC card can be copied to another CPC card in the OP2 card slot for the first CCU.
This is particularly useful when performed after completion of initial system setup (as a recovery
measure) or before major changes are made to system configuration. This backup CPC can then be
used to immediately restore system operation.
This feature is a maintenance feature to be performed by the System certified dealer only.
Hardware Requirements
•
A second CPC card that matches the type installed must be used to copy the memory.
Considerations
•
N/A
Music-on-Hold
Description
The System can provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) to parties on hold (either trunk, extension, or
network party). The MOH feature can also be used to play announcements or advertisements if
desired.
Hardware Requirements
•
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
49
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
Important: A license may be required from the Society of Composers, Authors,
and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded
music through the MOH feature. Panasonic, its distributors, and affiliates
assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a
license.
Name Assignments
Description
Names may be assigned to the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Extensions
Trunks
Direct Dial Inwards (DDIs)
Personal Speed Dials (PSDs)
Systems Speed Dials (SSDs)
Trunk names and DDI names must be assigned in dealer programming mode. Extension names and
Speed Dial names may be assigned from a display telephone.
This feature does not require the use of a DSS/72 console or entering the programming mode.
Extension Name Assignments
Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length. (Assignment of extension names must be
allowed in the Extension COS.)
Operation
To set extension names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 2 for the Extension Name Assignment mode.
EXT
NO.=>
EXT
NAME displays
5. Enter the extension number.
XXX
6. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
7. Press the FL/R key to clear the existing data.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
50
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Action
Result
8. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
51.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 52.)
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-Display Phone” on page 51.
• See “Example 2. Small-Display Phone” on page 52.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 7-8 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired extension name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next extension number displays
12. To enter another extension name, press the CONF key and
repeat steps 5-11.
EXT
NO.=>
EXT
NAME displays
Example 1. Large-Display Phone
To enter D:
a. Press the first soft key on the top left.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
51
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
a. Press the third soft key from the top right.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Example 2. Small-Display Phone
Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press. (See step 7-8 above.)
abcdef
ghijkl
mnopqr
stuvwx
y z : & / sp
ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX
YZ.,’-
To enter D:
a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.
52
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
-
To enter o:
a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
53
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length.
The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed/restricted to anyone with a Class of
Service (COS) that allows access to User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User
Maintenance” of this document.)
Speed Dial Name Assignments
You can assign names to PSD numbers from a display telephone without entering the programming
mode. If allowed in the Extension COS, you can also assign names to SSD numbers.
Operation
PSD Names:
To set PSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode.
A B C D E F P80 displays (where P80 =
PSD bin 80)
5. Press the up or down arrow key to display the desired PSD
bin number.
A B C D E F PXX displays (where PXX
= desired PSD bin number)
6. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
51.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 52.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data
7. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 51.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 52.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
8. Repeat steps 6-7 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired PSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
9. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next PSD bin number displays
10. To enter another speed dial name repeat steps 5-9.
54
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
SSD Names:
To set SSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
5. Enter the speed dial bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
-SSDXXX
6. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
7. Press the FL/R key to clear the current data.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
8. Enter the speed dial name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
51.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 52.)
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 51.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 52.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next SSD bin number displays
12. To enter another speed dial name, press the CONF key
and repeat steps 5-11.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters. SSD names can contain a maximum of 16
characters.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
55
Chapter 3. System Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed/restricted to anyone with a Class of
Service (COS) that allows access to User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User
Maintenance” of this document.)
Network Facilities
Description
The System supports networking facilities such as:
•
Network Attendant Reversion (Version 3.5 and higher)
•
Network Call Routing
•
Network Call Transfer
•
Network Centralized Attendant (Version 3.5 and higher)
•
Network Centralized Voice Mail (Version 3.5 and higher)
•
Networking Extension Calling
•
Network Flash Transfer (Version 3.5 and higher)
•
Network Hold (Version 3.5and higher)
•
Network Paging
•
Network Transfer Recall (Version 3.5 and higher)
•
Tandem Calling
For more information on System Networking, see the System Networking Reference Manual.
Network Attendant Reversion
Version 3.5 and later
Network Attendant Reversion enables calls to revert to the attendant in the same CCU. Calls will not
revert if the CCU receiving the call has no attendant. Network Attendant Reversion does not work
with Network Hold.
Network Call Routing
Network Call Routing allows multiple systems that are interconnected in a network, to direct calls to a
specific tie line based on the number dialled. The call does not leave the network.
Network Call Transfer
Network Call Transfer allows a call at an extension to be transferred to another extension in the
network.
Network Centralized Attendant
Version 3.5 and later
Network Centralized Attendant allows callers from one node to dial the operator in another node by
dialing 0.
56
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Network Centralized Voice Mail
Version 3.5 and later
Network Centralized Voice Mail allows one primary attendant group in the network to handle network
attendant calls.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF6-2-04: Route Table: Digit Modify Pattern No.
FF6-2-05: Digit Modify Table - Add Ending Digits
FF6-2-05-0005: Numbering Plan
FF6-2-06: Authorization Code (UK Only)
FF6-2-09-0001: Dialing Access Voice Mail System
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Priority Message - Waiting Send/Cancel)
FF8-1-05: Call-Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
FF8-1-06: MSG Key ID Codes (USA only)
Network Extension Calling
Network Extension Calling allows you to reach an extension on another PBX. Based on the number
you dial, the System network routes the call automatically.
Network Flash Transfer
Version 3.5 and later
When three or more systems are networked together with one ICX as the tandem, Network Flash
Transfer determines where a call is held when Network Hold is pressed.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Network Flash Forwarding)
Network Hold
Version 3.5 and later
Network Hold allows the user to place a call on hold by pressing a programmed line key or MCO key.
When using Network Hold, you cannot establish a conference call between nodes, and only one party
can place the call on hold.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Broker’s Hold for Network Calls)
FF1-1-01-0020: Network Flash Signal Timer
FF1-2-02: FF Dial Codes: Plan A (Network Flash Send During Intercom Dial Tone)
FF1-2-03: FF Dial Codes: Plan B (Network Flash Send During Intercom Dial Tone)
FF4-0-BSSC-0: FF-Key Assignment (Network Flash During Talk on FF-key)
Network Paging
Network Paging allows users on one System to page on another System when the appropriate Class of
Service (COS) allows.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
57
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Network Transfer Recall
Version 3.5 and later
Network Transfer Recall allows a call which has been transferred to another node to recall back to the
transferring extension.
Tandem Connection
Tandem Connection allows calls that are received over the network tie lines to be automatically routed
on to another PBX or out to the public network.
Hardware Requirements
•
T1 (USA), E&M (HK) or AC-15 (UK) Card
Considerations
•
N/A
Non-Blocking Architecture
Description
The System is totally non-blocking. All extension and outside lines are available for use at the same
time.
Hardware Requirements
•
The CPC-96 supports up to 96 ports. The CP-288 supports up to 288 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW288. The CPC-576 supports up to 576 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW576.
Considerations
•
N/A
Power Failure Transfer
Description
Power Failure Transfer provides telephone service to a limited number of Single Line Telephones
(SLTs) during a power failure. The SLTs are connected to the trunk via a Power Failure Unit (PFU). In
the event of a power failure, the power failure extensions have dial tone directly from the trunk.
(System features and restrictions do not apply.)
Hardware Requirements
58
•
Power Failure Unit (VB-43703)
•
An SLT that will be connected to the PFU.
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Considerations
•
•
Up to four SLTs can be connected to one PFU.
For added protection against power outages, backup batteries can be installed in the System.
Backup batteries provide full telephone service and system features to all System extensions for
a limited amount of time. With maximum traffic, the backup batteries last up to 30 minutes in the
ICX.
Power On Maintenance
Description
The System allows you to change most circuit cards, programming, and many other maintenance
features while the System is powered on and operating. Very few operations require the System to be
powered down or out of service. The System therefore continues to operate without interruption for
most maintenance functions.
A limited number of items such as the replacement of some common control circuit cards requires the
system to be powered down.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Programming Devices
Description
The dealer may program the System either by using:
•
•
A digital key telephone equipped with display
A PC-Based Customizing Tool
Telephone Programming
The System can be fully programmed from an extension telephone equipped with 12 FF keys and a
display. While major system configuration changes may be more easily performed using a PC
programmer, all programming is available via a telephone. This is especially useful for minor changes
to the system configuration.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
59
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
PC-Based Customizing Tool
The System can be completely configured using the PC-Based Customizing Tool. This may be done
either by directly connecting to the System or by remote connection using a modem.
The System database can be uploaded and downloaded for easy storage and retrieval.
The PC-Based Customizing Tool connects to the System through the RS232C maintenance port.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
QSIG ISDN Lines
Version 3.5 and later
Description
QSIG is a digital signaling protocol for private-network phone systems comprised of ISDN lines.
Internationally, it is also called Private Signaling System No. 1 (PSS1).
QSIG, developed in the late 1980’s and still in the process of global standardization, provides the
ability to efficiently interconnect the remote ISDN PBX sites of large organization. In addition to
normal phone service, QSIG also supports advanced applications such as interconnection of voice/
fax/DP servers, broadband private networks, etc. In other words with QSIG “it’s not just a phone line
anymore.”
For more information on QSIG, see Section 570: QSIG Reference.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF2-1: QSIG ISDN Lines
Considerations
•
N/A
Ringing Modes
Description
The System supports multiple types of trunk ringing including the following:
•
•
•
60
Day 1/Day 2/Night Ringing
Day 1/Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing
DDI Day/Night Ringing
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 3. System Features
DDI Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing
Busy Lamp Field Immediate Ringing
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing
Slide Ringing
Alarm Ringing
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing
When the System is in Day 1 mode, calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt
group per the Day 1 ringing assignments.
When the System is in Day 2 mode, calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt
group per the Day 2 ringing assignments.
When the system is in Night mode, call can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt
group per the Night ringing assignments.
Inbound calls can be directed to desired normal daytime locations by setting the system into a Day
mode. By having a second day mode (Day 2) alternative call handling is available during day
operation. For instance, during lunch, calls can be directed to an alternative position.
Calls can be directed specific night locations when the system is set to Night mode.
For more information on Day Ringing, see “Day/Night System Mode” on page 36.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing causes an incoming outside call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a
certain period of time, to ring at a designated extension or extensions. Delayed ringing destinations
can be set for Day 1, Day 2 and Night modes. trunk Delayed Ringing is also available for hunt group
pilot numbers.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
DDI (DID) Day/Night Ringing
(Note: Analog DID is not available in the UK, TX or EX model).
Incoming DDI calls can be set to ring at day destinations when the system is in day mode and ring at
night destinations when the system is in night mode.
Hardware Requirements
•
DDI (DID) Trunk Card
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
61
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
N/A
DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing
DDI Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing causes an incoming DDI call to a busy primary extension to
ring at a designated extension or extensions. DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing also causes an incoming
DDI call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a certain period of time, to ring at a
designated extension or extensions. Separate ring destinations are available for day and night modes.
DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing is also available for hunt group pilot numbers. However, when the
Queuing Timer expires, the call leaves the hunt group and is forwarded to the DDI Busy/Delayed
Ringing destination.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
Call Forwarding takes priority over DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing
If the call is part of a hunt group and the Queuing Timer expires, the call is forwarded to the DDI
Busy/Delay Ringing destination. (See “DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing” on page
62.)
Busy Lamp Field Ringing
Extensions that have Direct Station Select (DSS)/BLF FF keys assigned may be set to ring on those
keys.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing.
For more information on BLF ringing, see “Line Appearances” on page 174.
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing
Extensions that have Direct Station Select (DSS)/BLF FF keys assigned may be set to delay ring on
those keys.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing.
For more information on BLF ringing, see “Line Appearances” on page 174.
Slide Ringing
Similar to Delayed Ringing, Slide Ringing allows an alternate position to answer calls. If a call is not
answered within a slide ringing time period, the call can be set to ring at another phone with that trunk
key.
62
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
One possible use for Slide Ringing is in an office with a common secretary. A non-ringing FF key can
be assigned for each trunk used by the group. If a call is not answered within the slide ringing timer,
the call will ring the common secretary.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Alarm Ringing
Alarm Ringing allows the incoming ringing tone to be changed if the call is not answered in a
predetermined time. This can be very useful in alerting others to pick up unanswered calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
If slide ringing is enabled, it will override alarm ringing.
Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging)
Description
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) provides detailed call records of outgoing
calls. Call Logging records can be output to a printer or an external call accounting system.
Various types of information are reported on the Call Logging record and each type of information
occupies a set position in the Call Logging format (See Figure 1 on page 64.) One type of information
is the “condition code” which occupies the first position in the output format. This code specifies what
type of call was made or received (e.g., DISA Incoming call [S] or Closed Numbering call [W]).
However, condition codes are prioritized, and the type of call determines what code is displayed.
The following tables shows the priority of condition codes for outgoing calls and incoming calls.
Table 8.
Priority of outgoing call condition codes
Priority
Condition
Code
Description
Highest
T or H
2nd
F
T = Outgoing Transfer Call
H = Outgoing Hold Call
F = Call Forward Outside Call
3rd
W
W = Closed Numbering
Note: In the case of an MCO outgoing call seizing the
private line, the condition code 0 is displayed.
ICX-50-700
4th
L
L = LCR Outgoing Call
Lowest
O
O = Outgoing Call
ICX (International) issued October 2000
63
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
For example, an outgoing call is an LRS Outgoing call (L) but it is also a transferred call. The Call
Logging data condition code will be T to indicate that the call was an Outgoing Transfer. (A
transferred call’s condition code takes precedence over the type of call - LRS Outgoing call [L].)
Table 9.
Priority of incoming call condition codes
Condition
Code
Priority
Highest
h or t
2nd
D, N, or S
Lowest
I or A
Description
h = Incoming Hold
t = Incoming Transfer
D = DDI Incoming Call
N = Network Incoming Call
S = DISA Incoming Call
I = Incoming Call
A = Abandoned Call
For example, an incoming call is a DDI Incoming call (D), but it is also a transferred call. The Call
Logging data condition code will be t to indicate that the call was an Incoming Transfer call. (A
transferred call’s condition code takes precedence over the type of call - DDI Incoming call [D].)
Figure 1.
Output data formatt
Format #1
T MM/DD HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS NNNN TTTT dddddddddddddddddddddddd aaaaaaaaaa vvvvvH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Format #2
T MM/DD HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS NNNN TTTT dddddddddddddddddddddddd aaaaaaaaaa vvvv
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
dddddddddddddddd cccccccc MM:SSH
9
10
11
1
Condition Code: (I: Incoming call / D: DDI incoming call / h: Hold incoming call / N: Network
incoming call / S:DISA incoming call / t: Transfer incoming call / A: Abandoned Call / O: Outgoing
call [Non LCR] / F: Call forward outside call / H: Hold outgoing call / L: LCR outgoing call / T:
Transfer outgoing call / W: Closed Numbering)
2
Call Start Time (MM=01 to 12 / DD=01 to 31 / HH=00 to 23 / MM=00 to 59 / SS=00 to 59)
3
Call Duration Time (HH=00 to 23 / MM=00 to 59 / SS=00 to 59)
4
Trunk User No. (Extension line No.: 0 to 9999 / trunk No.: C001 to C576)
5
Trunk No. (Trunk No.: 001 to 576 / When trunk is disconnected while the call is on hold: *001 to
*576)
64
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
6
Dialled No. (24 digits max. including 0-9, *, # Cannot display Flash or Pause. If a number is hidden,
* will appear instead of digits. * will stay with the call even if the call is transferred. For Format 2, an
I Proceeds the digits if it is an incoming call.)
7
Accounting Code (10 digits max.)/Verified Account Code (Verified Account Code table number
V001 to V500)
8
DISA Security Code ID (DISA ID code table number D001-D016)
9
Caller Data (Format #2 only)
10
ISDN Charge Data (Format #2 only - originator number applies to ISDN only) - Not Used (Format #2
only) Future Use
11
Incoming Ringing Time (Format #2 only) (MM=00 to 99 / SS=00 to 59)
H
Carriage Return Line Feed
Hardware Requirements
•
A printer or external call accounting system is required to receive Call Logging data.
Considerations
•
•
A call must be answered to generate Call Logging data (e.g., answered by Voicemail, call pickup,
etc.)
You can specify which type of Call Logging data format is sent (i.e., either Format 1 or 2).
System Speed Dial TRS (Call Barring) Override
Description
System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers may be used to outdial calls from extensions that otherwise have
outgoing call restrictions (i.e., Toll Restriction Service [TRS] Call Barring).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Toll Restriction Service (Call Barring)
Description
Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call Barring allows access levels, including the prohibition of long
distance calls or after-hours calls, to be assigned to specific extensions or trunks. This minimizes nonICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
65
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
business related calls and reduces phone bills by only allowing long distance calls over designated
lines.
TRS (Call Barring) can be used in conjunction with Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
•
TRS (Call Barring ) classes are set on an extension and trunk basis. Up to 50 TRS (Call
Barring) classes can be assigned.
•
Each TRS (Call Barring) class is then assigned to a TRS level. This level is used as the basis
for allowing or restricting calls.
•
There are 10 TRS (Call Barring ) levels available: 0 denies all calls, 1-8 may be partially
restrictive per assignments, and 9 allows all calls.
•
TRS (Call Barring) can restrict the number of digits dialled (1 to 20 digits limit or no limit).
•
TRS (Call Barring) can restrict the use of System Speed Dials (SSDs) for out dealing on a
TRS (Call Barring) class basis; either no system speed dials or limit the range of SSDs.
•
TRS (Call Barring) can restrict the use of the star (*) or pound (#) digits on a TRS (Call
Barring) class basis.
The following calling restrictions are also available:
•
Forced ARS Restriction (The ARS feature controls outside calls.)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The dialling restrictions included in this feature help prevent unauthorized outgoing calls. It is
possible; however, to program your System to allow SSD to override TRS (Call Barring).
Trunk Access Groups
Description
Trunks can be placed in trunk groups. When a trunk group is accessed, the System automatically
selects an open trunk from the group.
Operation
To access a trunk group:
Action
Result
1. Enter the Trunk Access Code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
2. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
66
N/A
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Considerations
•
•
Trunks can only appear in one trunk group.
If Automatic Call Routing is enabled, the MCO access code (default = 9 [UK/HK] and 0
[Taiwan/Malaysia/Indonesia]) automatically accesses the Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
features.
Trunk Interface
Description
The System supports several types of trunk Interfaces including the following:
•
•
•
•
Direct Dial Inward (DDI)
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
ISDN - Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
Loop Start
Each trunk type supports various features such as Delayed Ringing, Night Ringing, etc.
Trunk Interface - DDI (Not Available on UK, TX or EX Model)
The DDI feature allows an extension to have a dedicated direct number. The dedicated number allows
calls to be made directly to the extension, without the caller going through the attendant.
The DDI number may have from 1 to 4 digits (typically 4).
Each DDI Trunk Interface card (VB-44520) supports up to 8 DDI trunks.
Hardware Requirements
•
The -48V power supply is required.
Considerations
•
•
The DDI Trunk card supports 1 to 4-digit dial-pulse (10 pps) or Dual Tone Multifrequency
(DTMF) signalling.
DDI numbers must be between 0 and 9999.
Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI
The System supports ISDN BRI with the VB-44530 ISDN BRI interface unit. The VB-44530 is a TPoint ISDN-BRI that supports 2 B (bearer) channels and 1 D (data) channel (2B + D; 144kbps or
192kbps). This unit connects to an ISDN Data Service Unit (DSU). Point-to-point and point-to-multi
operations are selectable.
The ISDN-BRI supports enblock setting and enblock setting at the sub-address.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
A DSU is required (not available from Panasonic). Normally the DSU is supplied by the
telephone service provider.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
67
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Trunk Interface - ISDN-PRI
The System supports ISDN PRI with the VB-44540 ISDN PRI Interface unit. The VB-44540 is a T/SPoint ISDN PRI that supports 30B (for UK) or 23B (for HK) (bearer) channels and 1 D (data) channel
(30B + D; 2M) (23B + D; 1.5M). This unit connects to an ISDN DSU.
Up to 3 units may be installed in a CCU if you use full channel (30B + D)/(23B + D or 24B). A
maximum of 18 units may be utilised in a fully equipped system. When all 30 or 23 channels on a unit
are utilised in one card, four or three slot positions are required.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Interface - Loop Start
The VB-44510UK Loop Start interface unit supplies 8 loop start analog exchange line circuits. In
addition, the VB-44510UK Loop Start interface unit may alternatively be used to connect to loop start
exchange lines.
Hardware Requirements
•
VB-44510UK Loop Start Card
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Ringing Types
Description
Several types of trunk ringing are available for the System including the following:
•
•
•
•
Direct Dial Inward (DDI) Ringing
Direct Line (DL) Ringing
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ringing
Multiple Ringing
These ringing types may be used in any combination in the System.
DDI Ringing
DDI Ringing allows calls on a common trunk to be directed to ring to a specific extension or group of
extensions, etc. based upon the final digits dialled. These final digits are received from the DDI trunk
and compared to a DDI Table that determines where the calls should ring. Depending on the
assignments in the DDI Table, names or trunk numbers are displayed. (Names can be up to 10 digits
long.)
DDI Ringing can be very useful by sending calls directly to a specific extension, hunt group, etc.
based upon the number dialled. Since a relatively small number of trunks handle the DDI calls, this
can be more cost efficient than DL trunks or attendant group answering and transfer. (DDI may send a
68
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
call to a group using the Virtual Extension feature.) DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing is also available with
DDI Ringing. (See “DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing” on page 62.)
For more information on DDI trunk Trunk Interface, see “Trunk Interface - DDI (Not Available on
UK, TX or EX Model)” on page 67.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Caller ID takes priority over the DDI name assignment.
•
Only one of the two DDI tables may have name assignments.
•
If the DDI/DL destination is a Directory Number (DN), the call goes to an extension that has a
destination key even if the Primary Directory Number extension is busy or does not answer.
•
If the DDI/DL destination is an UNA extension, the UNA will ring depending on DDI number
tenant group/ DL incoming trunk tenant group.
Direct Line Ringing
DL Ringing allows calls on a specific trunk to be directed to ring a specific extension, System Speed
Dial (SSD) number (for redirecting calls out), and hunting group.
This can be very useful when a trunk is dedicated to a specific person or purpose. However, this can
be a more expensive use of the line since it has a more limited use.
Prior to Version 4.0, it was impossible to distinguish between Private Line incoming calls and
Directory Number incoming calls. Version 4.0 and higher allows the person receiving the call to
easily distinguish between these types of incoming calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
If the DDI/DL destination is a Directory Number (DN), the call goes to an extension that has a
destination key even if the Primary Directory Number extension is busy or does not answer.
•
If the DDI/DL destination is an UNA extension, the UNA will ring depending on DDI number
tenant group/ DL incoming trunk tenant group.
Direct Inward System Access Ringing
DISA Ringing (which is related to the DISA feature) allows a trunk specified as a DISA trunk to ring
and give off-site users dial-in access to the System. Once the DISA trunk is accessed, the user receives
dial tone and may dial an extension.
For more information on DISA, see “Direct Inward System Access” on page 41.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
69
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement
Version 4.0 and higher
Prior to Version 4.0, a DIL call that was not answered by the Immediate Ringing extension was
simultaneously passed to all other extensions in the MCO if Delayed Ringing was set. Beginning with
Version 4.0, an incoming DIL call that is not answered can be passed to a single Delayed Ring
destination or to all extensions with an MCO key that includes the incoming exchange line. If the
Delayed Ringing extension is not answered, the call is forwarded the extension’s preprogrammed
location (e.g., Voice Mail, Call Forwarding, etc.) For example:
DIL Immediate
(DIL Destination = 300)
DIL Delayed
(DIL Delayed Destination = 301)
Both Versions
FF2-0-BSSC-031 (DIL Dest. = 300)
1. Call rings on Ext. 300 only
Version 3.6
Version 4.0
FF2-0-BSSC-0441 (DIL Dest. = 300)
1. Call rings on Ext. 300
2. Call rolls over to Ext. 301, 302 and
303 simultaneously because they have
an MCO key that includes the
exchange line.
FF2-0-BSSC-041 (DIL Dest. = 300)
1. Call rings on Ext. 300
2. System can be programmed to ring
Ext. 301 only, or to ring all three
extensions.
Note: The program settings in the previous figure can also be used for the following Delayed
Ringing extension destinations:
- Speed Dial
- Hunt Group Number
- Attendant Group Number
- ERA Number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF2-0-BSSC-03 (Ring Assignment)
•
FF2-0-BSSC-04 (Delayed Ring Assignment)
•
FF1-0-02-0027 (DIL Delayed Ringing Pattern)
Considerations
•
70
N/A
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Multiple Ringing
Description
Multiple Ringing allows trunk calls into the System to be directed to ring multiple extensions in the
System. This can be very useful when anyone in a group may answer a call. This can also be very
useful at night when only a selected number of people are available to handle calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Virtual Port
Description
Virtual ports are not physical ports in the System. They are phantom or simulated ports used in the
System to support:
•
•
Virtual extension ringing
Virtual floating hold
Up to 96 virtual ports may be assigned per CCU.
Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension
You can assign an actual extension number to a virtual port. You can then assign the extension number
as any actual extension (incoming call settings and types, Station Class of Service (COS), tenant
group, pickup group, etc.). You can also assign the virtual port to an FF key on one or more telephones
and set to ring. Any call directed to the virtual port extension number will ring the assigned
telephone(s).
Virtual extensions provide a mechanism for ringing multiple phones simultaneously. For instance, a
Direct Inward Dialling (DDI) entry can only be set to ring to one extension number. However, if the
DDI is set to ring a virtual extension and the virtual extension is assigned to ring keys on multiple
extensions, the DDI will ring the multiple extensions.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Virtual Port used for Floating Hold
You can assign a virtual port that is not assigned an extension number to be used for floating hold. The
virtual port is assigned to an FF key. Calls can then be placed on hold on the virtual port FF key. Any
extension that is assigned the same virtual port FF key can then pick up the held call.
This can be used like a system park feature.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
71
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)
Description
The System supports third party Voice Mail systems with features such as:
•
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail
•
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
•
CLI/DDI ID Code for Voice Mail
•
High Priority Message Waiting
•
Message Key ID Code
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail
Description
This feature allows the System to send an answer signal to third-party Voice Mail systems.
Without this feature a third-party Voice Mail cannot receive a signal indicating that a System
extension has answered. In other words, to determine that the extension has answered, the Voice Mail
system would have to wait until the extension stops receiving ringback tone. As a result, waiting for
the ringback to stop often delays connection times for calls from Voice Mail to extensions. By sending
an answer signal, this feature provides quicker response time between the ICX and the Voice Mail
system.
Hardware Requirements
•
AEC Port
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
The digits used for the answer signal code are determined by the requirements of the Voice Mail
system.
The answer code may be up to 4 characters and consist of the characters 0 - 9, *, #, and pause.
If the called extension does not answer and is forwarded to Voice Mail, the System sends a Call
Forward ID code back to the Voice Mail system.
During transmission of the answer signal code, other DTMF digits and functions from the ICX or
S-ICX extension are ignored.
The Voice Mail port must be assigned as a Voice Mail port connection.
The DTMF pattern is set as pattern 2.
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail allows you to call forward to a third-party Voice Mail system.
The ID Code sends the digits that are required by the Voice Mail to identify the System extension.
72
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Operation
To set a Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail:
Action
Result
1. Go offhook or press ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the Call Forward ID Code (default = 715 [UK/HK or
715# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Enter V.M. ID displays
3. Enter the ID code required by voice mail (see your voice
mail manual). Usually this is the extension number.
Stored V.M. ID displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Go onhook or press ON/OFF key.
To clear the ID Code:
Action
Result
1. Go offhook or press ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the Call Forward ID Code (default = 715 [UK/HK or
715# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Enter V.M. ID displays
3. Press the HOLD key.
Cleared V.M. ID displays
4. Go onhook or press ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code
CLI/DDI calls may be sent directly to voice mail through the used of the DDI Voice Mail ID Code. A
prefix and suffix may be specified to be sent to the voice mail as well as a chosen number of DDI
digits.
Either no digits (default), the last two digits of the DDI, the last three digits of the DDI or the entire
DDI number may be sent.
The prefix may be up to eight digits including 0-9, *, # and pause (REDIAL).
The suffix may be up to eight digits including 0-9, *, # and pause (REDIAL).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
Each pause is a fixed 1 second delay.
If you do not assign a Voice Mail ID Code, the DDI digits will be sent to voice mail.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
73
Chapter 3. System Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
Only one Voice Mail ID Code is available for the system.
Disconnect Signal
Beginning with CPC Version 3.0, either busy tone or silence can be sent to a third-party voice mail
system when the caller hangs up.
High Priority Message Waiting
Message waiting displays and LEDs may be utilized by the Voice Mail system to indicate that a Voice
Mail message has been left in your mail box. When you retrieve the message, the message waiting
indications are cleared.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
For more information on setting and retrieving message waiting, see the telephone operation
sections that follow in this document.
Message Key ID Code
On a large-display phone you can use a Message key (labelled MSG) to either retrieve Voice Mail
messages or respond to telephone messages. When responding to Voice Mail messages from a 3rd
party Voice Mail system, the Message key needs to have an ID code set to identify the caller to the
Voice Mail system. You can also use the Message key to program a Voice Mail password.
You must program the Message key using the User Maintenance feature “Set Message Key ID Code”
on page 90.
Operation
To retrieve a message at Voice Mail:
Action
1. Press the MSG key.
Result
Voice mail instructions
2. Follow the Voice Mail instructions for retrieving messages.
3. When finished retrieving messages, replace the handset or
press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
74
N/A
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Voice Mail Transfer Key
Description
The Voice Mail Transfer (VM/TRF) key allows you to transfer calls to voice mailboxes without
waiting for voice mail to answer. You can assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone or through
system programming.
Two Voice Mail Transfer keys are available. VM Transfer Key 1 will transfer to a voice mail
extension number. Voice Mail Transfer Key 2 will transfer to the voice mail pilot number.
Prior to Version 5.0, the VM/TRF key could not be used to transfer a call into Voice Mail on another
networked ICX or S-ICX system. Beginning with Version 5.0, the user can press the VM/TRF key to
send a call across a node to another networked ICX or S-ICX system.
Operation
To assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the FF key to be assigned as the Voice Mail Transfer
key.
4. Press REDIAL and 74nnnn (VM Transfer Key 1) where
nnnn is the voice mail extension number
or
Press REDIAL and 75nnnn (VM Transfer Key 2) where
nnnn is the voice mail extension number
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To use a Voice Mail Transfer key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key to answer the
incoming call.
Connected to caller
2. Press the VM/TRF (1 or 2) key .
System places caller on hold
3. Press the DSS/BLF key, dial an extension number or select
the extension from the extension directory on the large display telephone.
4. Replace the handset or press the RELEASE, ON/OFF, or
PROG key.
Once a call is sent to the voice mail, after the voice mail answers, the system sends the VM Transfer
ID 1 or 2 + the extension number (BLF/DSS, Directory or dialled number).
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
75
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
76
The VM/TRF key can be assigned to any key phone, DSS/72 or EM/24. The VM/TRF key
cannot be assigned to a one-touch key.
The VM/TRF key can be used to transfer intercom as well as trunk calls to a voice mailbox.
The Voice Mail Transfer ID codes are assigned in the Maintenance Programming section. Up to
ten digits can be stored.
The system responds to key operations during the transfer in the following ways:
• Pressing the FL/R key cancels the VM/TRF and returns intercom dial tone to the user.
When the VM/TRF is cancelled, the incoming call is still connected but is on hold.
• If a valid key (trunk key or second DSS key, for example) is pressed, the VM/TRF is
cancelled and the operation invoked by the key is performed.
• If an invalid key (REDIAL, for example) is pressed, the VM/TRF is cancelled, and the
user receives busy tone.
• Once VM/TRF is pressed, the user can dial up to 10 digits before completing the transfer.
If a user begins to perform the voice mail transfer and the extension cannot hold a call (one call is
already on non-appearance hold, for example), the system will keep the call in the talk state and
will not allow the voice mail transfer to be initiated.
If the VM/TRF key stores a number other than a voice mail extension number, the system does
not send DSS/BLF information or the extension number that is dialled after pressing VM/TRF.
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System maintenance topics and features:
Topic
Page
Introduction
77
About User Programming
79
Set Absence Messages
80
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
81
Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
82
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
83
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
84
Set Day of Week Mode
85
Set Exception Day Mode
87
Set Extension Names
89
Set Message Key ID Code
90
Set Mode Schedule
91
Set Personal Speed Dial Names
93
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers
98
Set Send Text Messages
99
Set Special Day Mode
100
Set System Date/Time/Day
107
Set System Speed Dial Index
108
Set System Speed Dial Names
109
Set System Speed Dial Numbers
111
Set Text Message Replies
112
Set Verified Account Codes
113
Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes
115
Introduction
User Maintenance provides several items that can be adjusted by the end user of the telephone system.
The telephone system dealer is not required to make these changes. These items include settings for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
ICX-50-700
Absence Messages
CID Logging Ext
Call Forward ID Code
Date and Time - including date, time, and day of week
Extension name
Message Key ID Code
ICX (International) issued October 2000
77
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
78
Section 700 - Operation
Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Assignment - including PSD number and name
Send Text Messages
System mode. You can set the System to handle incoming calls, outbound call routing, and
built-in voice mail call messages differently depending upon whether the system is in Day 1
mode, Day 2 mode, or Night mode. With User Maintenance, you can program the System for
mode schedule, mode schedule for special day, mode schedule for exception days, and day of
the month patterns.
System Speed Dial (SSD) Assignment - including SSD number and name
Text Message Replies
TRF of CFID
Verified Account Code
Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Code
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
About User Programming
User Maintenance requires a Digital Display Key Telephone assigned to a Class of Service (COS) that
allows User Maintenance.
The procedures in the following sections describe the basic steps used for modifying parameters.
However, there are many alternative ways to view and modify the parameters using special keys and
procedures. Some of the more advanced keys include:
REDIAL
FL/R
ON/OFF
HOLD
PROG
CONF
MEMORY
MENU
PREV
(At menu level) clears an entry
(At data entry) retrieves the last entry setting
(At menu level) ignored
(At data entry) clears setting
Begins programming log-in or exits programming
(At menu level) moves to date and time
(At data entry) saves the displayed setting and moves to the next setting
Moves to the 81 User Maintenance Menu
Moves to the first data setting
Backs out of the address menu levels
Ignored
(At menu level) moves to the previous screen
(At data entry) ignored
NEXT
(At menu level) moves to the next screen
(At data entry) ignored
VOLUME (down) Scrolls through the same address level (ascending)
VOLUME (up) Scrolls through the same address level (descending)
FF1
PSD Assignment menu
FF2
SSD Assignment menu
FF3
Extension Name menu
FF4
Verified ID Code menu
FF5
Call Forward ID Code menu
FF6
Message Key ID Code menu
FF7
System Mode menu
FF8
Walking /Station Lock TRS (Call Barring)
FF9
TRF of CWRD
FF10
CID Logging Ext.
Note: Once in a data entry level, you must either enter an acceptable value or restore the previous
value before proceeding. For instance, if you change an entry to an unacceptable value and then press
FF1 to move to the PSD Assignment menu, you will not be able to proceed. You must first enter an
acceptable value.
Operation
To enter User Maintenance mode:
Action
Result
1. At a telephone with a COS that allows user login, press the
ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key twice (* *).
4. Press the CONF key.
81User MAINT displays
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
79
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Note: Your extension’s COS must be properly set to allow User Maintenance access. Also, only one
user may enter User Maintenance or System Programming at a time.
Set Absence Messages
Description
This menu item specifies absences messages.
Operation
To set Absence Messages using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 12.
8112-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Absence Message displays
Enter Msg # displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Enter the Message number (0-9).
ABCDEF
6. Press the HOLD key.
X
displays (where X = Absence Message
number)
7. Enter the Absence Message (up to 15 characters):
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
95.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
8. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.
• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
9. Repeat steps 7-8 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired Absence Message.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
10. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
80
Next message number displays
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
11. To set additional Absence Messages, press the volume up
or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
Absence Message.
Result
Desired Absence Message displays
12. Repeat steps 7-11 until all Absence Messages are entered.
13. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
Enter Msg # displays
14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
Description
You can assign a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension for each extension. This is typically used
for forwarding calls to voice mail.
Operation
To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large-display or
small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 09.
8109-
3. Press the HOLD key.
TRF of CFWD displays
4. Enter 0.
CFWD-Busy EXT # displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Dial the extension number.
Enter CODE displays
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the destination extension.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
ICX-50-700
Next extension number displays
ICX (International) issued October 2000
81
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
10. To set Call Forward Busy destinations for additional
extensions, press the volume up and down key or press the
HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.
11. Repeat steps 9-11 until all extension are entered.
12. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
Description
(For a description of Call Forward ID codes for Voice Mail, see “Call Forward ID Code for Voice
Mail” on page 72.)
Voice Mail Call-Forward ID codes are used by voice mail systems to identify the correct mail box for
storing messages. The actual entry needed will vary by voice mail systems and configuration. Often
the entry is the extension number.
Operation
To set the Call Forward ID code:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 05.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8105C.FWD ID Code displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
CF ID-EXT Number displays
5. Dial the extension number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
82
CF-ID EXT XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
7. Enter the Call Forward ID code.
Notes: The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain
0, 1-9, *, #, pause (REDIAL key).
To clear an entry or any existing data, press the FL/R key.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
9. To set additional Call Forward ID codes, press the volume
up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired extension.
Desired extension displays
10. Repeat steps 7-9 until all Call Forward ID codes are set.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
CF ID-EXT Number displays
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
Description
You can assign a Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension for each extension. This is typically
used for forwarding calls to voice mail.
Operation
To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large-display or
small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 09.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8109TRF of CFWD displays
4. Enter 1.
5. Press the HOLD key.
ICX-50-700
CFWD-NoANS Ext displays
ICX (International) issued October 2000
83
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
6. Dial the extension number.
Enter CODE displays
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the destination extension.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
10. To set Call Forward No Answer destinations for additional
extensions, press the volume up and down key or press the
HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.
11. Repeat steps 9-11 until all extension are entered.
12. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
Description
You can assign Caller ID Call Logging to extensions. The system is limited to 20 call logging
extensions per cabinet as follows:
84
Number of Cabinets
Total Number of
Call Log Extensions
1
20
2
40
3
60
4
80
5
100
6
120
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Operation
To set a Caller ID Logging Extensions using either a large-display or small-display
phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 10.
8110-
3. Press the HOLD key.
CID Logging EXT displays
CID Logging # displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Enter log control number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Dial the extension number.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next log control # displays
9. To set CID Log for additional extensions, press the volume
up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired Extension.
10. Repeat steps 6-8 until all extension are entered.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Day of Week Mode
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
40.)
The System allows you to specify up to 3 mode patterns. This menu item determines which pattern to
follow for a given week day in the month (i.e., first Monday, second Monday, etc.).
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
85
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Some bushiness may have special operating hours based on the day of the month. For instance, a
company may work half-days on the second Saturday of each month.
Operation
To set the Day of Week Modes:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
8107-
3. Press the HOLD key.
System Mode displays
4. Enter 3.
3-
5. Press the HOLD key.
D of Week PTN displays
300
6. Press the HOLD key.
:
1st SUN Pattern displays
7. Enter pattern (0 - no pattern, 1 - pattern 1, 2 - pattern 2, 3 pattern 3) for the first Sunday.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next Day of Week mode displays
9. To set additional Day of Week modes, press the volume up
or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
mode.
Desired Day of Week mode displays
10. Repeat steps 7-9 until the remaining days in the month are
set.
Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 10 on page 87.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
3D of Week PTN displays
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
86
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Table 10.
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Day of the Week - addresses
-- DAY OCCURRENCE --
ADDRESSES
FOR THESE
DAYS OF THE
WEEK:
(e.g., 1st Sunday=address 300; 2nd Sunday=address 307)
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Sunday
300
307
314
321
328
Monday
301
308
315
322
329
Tuesday
302
309
316
323
330
Wednesday
303
310
317
324
331
Thursday
304
311
318
325
332
Friday
305
312
319
326
333
Saturday
306
313
320
327
334
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Exception Day Mode
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
40.)
You can specify exception days which allow for a range of days for the System to operate in the Night
mode. This is intended for extended holidays for business shut down periods that last for multiple
days. You can specify up to 6 exception day periods.
Operation
To set the Exception Day Modes:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8107System Mode displays
4. Enter 2.
5. Press the HOLD key.
2Mode Except Day displays
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
87
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
200
6. Press the HOLD key.
:MMDD
PTN 1 Start Day displays
7. Enter the start date by month (two characters) and day (two
characters) for Exception Period 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
201
8. Press the HOLD key.
:MMDD
PTN 1 Stop Day displays
9. Enter the stop date by month (two characters) and day (two
characters) for Exception Period 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
10. Press the HOLD key.
Next Exception Day mode displays
11. To set additional Exception Day modes, press the volume
up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired mode.
Desired Exception Day mode displays
12. Repeat steps 7-11 until all Exception Day modes are set.
(Up to 6 exception periods may be specified.)
Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 11 on page 88.
2-
13. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
Mode Except Day displays
14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
Table 11.
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
ON/OFF LED goes off
OR...
Exception Days
8107-2
(200-211)
EXCEPTION DAYS:
200=Start - Exception Day 1
201=End - “
202=Start - Exception Day 2
203=End - “
204=Start - Exception Day 3
205=End - “
206=Start - Exception Day 4
207=End - “
208=Start - Exception Day 5
209=End - “
210=Start - Exception Day 6
211=End - “
88
81-
“
Hold
(MMDD)
Hold
Month/Day of Exception Days
(Start or End)
“
“
“
“
“
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Extension Names
Description
You can assign names to each extension, even if the extension is not a display telephone. When the
extension is called, the name appears on the display. For more information on the digital key
telephone display, see “Display Information” on page 157.
Operation
To set extension names using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 03.
8103-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Extension Name displays
0
4. Press the HOLD key.
:
EXT Number/Name displays
Enter EXT # displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Dial the extension number.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
95.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.
• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
89
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired speed dial name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
12. To set additional extension names, press the volume up
and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired SSD.
13. Repeat steps 8-12 until all extension names are entered.
14. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
15. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
Enter EXT # displays
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Message Key ID Code
Description
(For a description of the Message Key ID Code Feature, see “Message Key ID Code” on page 74.)
On a large display phone you can use a Message key to either retrieve voice mail messages or respond
to telephone messages. To respond to voice mail messages from a 3rd party voice mail system, you
need to set the Message Key ID code to identify the caller to the voice mail system. You can also use
the Message key to program a voice mail password.
Operation
To set the Message Key ID code:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 06.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8106MSG Key ID Code displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
90
MSGID-EXT Number displays
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
5. Dial the extension number of the phone being programmed.
MSG-ID EXT XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the Message Key ID code.
Notes: The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain
0, 1-9, *, #, pause (REDIAL key).
To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
9. To set additional Message Key ID codes, press the volume
up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired extension.
Desired extension number displays
10. Repeat steps 7-9 until all Message Key ID codes are set.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
MSGID - EXT Number displays
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Mode Schedule
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
40.)
You can set the System to automatically enter None, Day 1, Day 2, Night, Night (1), or Night (2)
modes based upon mode patterns. You can define up to 3 patterns with up to 5 modes for each day.
(This menu allows the setting of the patterns.)
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
91
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set the Mode Schedule:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
8107-
3. Press the HOLD key.
System Mode displays
0-
4. Press the HOLD key.
Mode Schedule displays
000
5. Press the HOLD key.
:HHMM
PTN 1-1 Start T displays
6. Enter the start time in hours (two characters) and minutes
(two characters) for the Pattern 1 - first mode.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
001
7. Press the HOLD key.
:
PTN 1-1 Mode displays
8. Enter the desired mode for Pattern 1 - first (0 - None, 1 Day 1, 2 - Day 2, 3 - Night, 4 - Night (1), 5 - Night (2)).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next pattern mode displays
10. To set additional mode schedules, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
mode.
Desired pattern mode displays
11. Repeat steps 6-10 until all patterns and modes are set.
(There are 3 total patterns with 5 start time/modes each.)
Note: Entry Positions are listed in Table 12 on page 93.
12. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
0Mode Schedule displays
13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
92
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Table 12.
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Mode Schedule Patterns - addresses & values
FF8 1 07 0 (00-29) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (00-29) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
1st MODE
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Start Time
(HHMM)
00
02
04
06
08
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
01
03
05
07
09
Start Time
(HHMM)
10
12
14
16
18
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
11
13
15
17
19
Start Time
(HHMM)
20
22
24
26
28
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
21
23
25
27
29
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Personal Speed Dial Names
Description
For a description of Personal Speed Dial (PSD), see “Personal Speed Dial” on page 192 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “Personal Speed Dial” on page 255 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“Personal Speed Dial” on page 304 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
93
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set PSD names using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 01.
8101-
3. Press the HOLD key.
PSD Assignment displays
4. Enter 1.
1
5. Press the HOLD key.
:
PSD Name displays
EXT Number displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Dial the extension number.
Enter PSD # XXX displays (where
XXX = dialled extension number)
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
A B C D E F PXX displays (where
PXX = PSD number)
10. Press the HOLD key.
11. Enter the PSD name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
95.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
12. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.
• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
13. Repeat steps 11-12 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired speed dial name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
14. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next PSD bin number displays
15. To set additional PSD names, press the volume up and
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
PSD.
Desired PSD bin number displays
16. Repeat steps 11-15 until all PSD names are entered.
94
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
17. Press the MEMORY key to exit the PSD name entry
mode.
Enter PSD # XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
18. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Example 1. Large-Display Phone
To enter D:
a. Press the first soft key on the top left.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third soft key from the top right.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
95
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Example 2. Small-Display Phone
Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press.
abcdef
ghijkl
mnopqr
stuvwx
y z : & / sp
ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX
YZ.,’-
To enter D:
a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.
96
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
97
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers
Description
For a description of Personal Speed Dial (PSD), see “Personal Speed Dial” on page 192 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “Personal Speed Dial” on page 255 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“Personal Speed Dial” on page 304 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
To set PSD numbers:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 01.
8101-
3. Press the HOLD key.
PSD Assignment displays
0
4. Press the HOLD key.
:
PSD Number displays
EXT Number displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Dial the extension number.
Enter PSD # XXX displays (where
XXX = dialled extension number)
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
YYY
ZZ displays (where XXX
= extension number, YYY = assigned
name, and ZZ = PSD bin number)
9. Press the HOLD key.
10. Enter the PSD digits to be dialled.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next PSD bin number displays
12. To set additional PSD numbers, press the volume up and
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
PSD bin number.
Desired PSD bin number displays
13. Repeat steps 10-12 until all PSD numbers are entered.
14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
98
N/A
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Send Text Messages
Description
You can send a text message to a key telephone with a display when you are sending call waiting
signal (Auto camp-on or manual camp-on). This menu item specifies the text messages that may be
sent.
Operation
To set Send Text Messages using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 11.
8111-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Text Message displays
4. Enter 0.
8111-0:
5. Press the HOLD key.
Send Message displays
Enter Msg # displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the Message number (0-9).
ABCDEF
8. Press the HOLD key.
X
displays (where X = Send Text Message
number)
9. Enter the Text Message (up to 15 characters):
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
95.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.
• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
99
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired Text Message.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next message number displays
13. To set additional text Messages, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
Send Text Message.
Desired Text Message displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all Send Text Messages are
entered.
15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
Enter Msg # displays
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Special Day Mode
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
40.)
You can specify up to 20 special days for the System. For each special day, you can specify up to 5
modes settings.
Operation
To set the Special Day Modes:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8107System Mode displays
4. Enter 1.
100
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
1-
5. Press the HOLD key.
Mode Special Day displays
1000
6. Press the HOLD key.
:MMDD
Special Day 01 displays
7. Enter the date by month (two characters) and day (two characters) for the Special Day 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
1001
8. Press the HOLD key.
:HHMM
S Day 01-1 Start displays
9. Enter the start time in hours (two characters) and minutes
(two characters) for mode 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
1002
10. Press the HOLD key.
:
S Day 01-1 Mode displays
11. Enter the desired mode for Special Day ( (0 - None, 1 Day 1, 2 - Day 2, 3 - Night, 4 - Night(1), 5 - Night (2)).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
12. Press the HOLD key.
Next Special Day mode displays
13. To set additional Special Day modes, press the volume up
or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
mode.
14. Repeat steps 7-13 until all Special Day modes are set. (Up
to 20 special days may be entered.)
Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 13.
15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
1Mode Special Day displays
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
ON/OFF LED goes off
ICX-50-700
OR...
ICX (International) issued October 2000
101
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Table 13.
Section 700 - Operation
Special Day Start Time/Mode - addresses & values
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 1
Special Day 2
Special Day 3
Special Day 4
102
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1000
Start Time
(HHMM)
1001
1003
1005
1007
1009
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1002
1004
1006
1008
1010
Date
(MMDD)
1011
Start Time
(HHMM)
1012
1014
1016
1018
1020
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1013
1015
1017
1019
1021
Date
(MMDD)
1022
Start Time
(HHMM)
1023
1025
1027
1029
1031
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1024
1026
1028
1030
1032
Date
(MMDD)
1033
Start Time
(HHMM)
1034
1036
1038
1040
1042
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1035
1037
1039
1041
1043
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 5
Special Day 6
Special Day 7
Special Day 8
ICX-50-700
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1044
Start Time
(HHMM)
1045
1047
1049
1051
1053
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1046
1048
1050
1052
1054
Date
(MMDD)
1055
Start Time
(HHMM)
1056
1058
1060
1062
1064
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1057
1059
1061
1063
1065
Date
(MMDD)
1066
Start Time
(HHMM)
1067
1069
1071
1073
1075
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1068
1070
1072
1074
1076
Date
(MMDD)
1077
Start Time
(HHMM)
1078
1080
1082
1084
1086
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1079
1081
1083
1085
1087
ICX (International) issued October 2000
103
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 9
Special Day 10
Special Day 11
Special Day 12
104
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1088
Start Time
(HHMM)
1089
1091
1093
1095
1097
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1090
1092
1094
1096
1098
Date
(MMDD)
1099
Start Time
(HHMM)
1100
1102
1104
1106
1108
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1101
1103
1105
1107
1109
Date
(MMDD)
1110
Start Time
(HHMM)
1111
1113
1115
1117
1119
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1112
1114
1116
1118
1120
Date
(MMDD)
1121
Start Time
(HHMM)
1122
1124
1126
1128
1130
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1123
1125
1127
1129
1131
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 13
Special Day 14
Special Day 15
Special Day 16
ICX-50-700
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1132
Start Time
(HHMM)
1133
1135
1137
1139
1141
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1134
1136
1138
1140
1142
Date
(MMDD)
1143
Start Time
(HHMM)
1144
1146
1148
1150
1152
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1145
1147
1149
1151
1153
Date
(MMDD)
1154
Start Time
(HHMM)
1155
1157
1159
1161
1163
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1156
1158
1162
1162
1164
Date
(MMDD)
1165
Start Time
(HHMM)
1166
1168
1170
1172
1174
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1167
1169
1171
1173
1175
ICX (International) issued October 2000
105
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 17
Special Day 18
Special Day 19
Special Day 20
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1176
Start Time
(HHMM)
1177
1179
1181
1183
1185
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1178
1180
1182
1184
1186
Date
(MMDD)
1187
Start Time
(HHMM)
1188
1190
1192
1194
1196
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1189
1191
1193
1195
1197
Date
(MMDD)
1198
Start Time
(HHMM)
1199
1201
1203
1205
1207
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1200
1202
1204
1206
1208
Date
(MMDD)
1209
Start Time
(HHMM)
1210
1212
1214
1216
1218
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1211
1213
1215
1217
1219
Hardware Requirements
•
106
N/A
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Date/Time/Day
Description
The System allows you to change the date, time, and day of week. When setting the time, you can
specify 12 or 24 hour format.
Operation
To change the system date, time, and day of week:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 000.
0
3. Press the HOLD key.
:YYMMDD
Date displays
4. Enter the year (two characters), month (two characters), and
day (two characters).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
1
5. Press the HOLD key.
:HHMM
Time displays
6. Enter the hour (two characters) and minute (two characters).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
2
7. Press the HOLD key.
:
Day of the Week displays
8. Enter the day of week where:
1 = Mon, 2 = Tues., 3 = Wed., 4 = Thurs., 5 = Fri., 6 = Sat.,
0 = Sun.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
10. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
ICX-50-700
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
ICX (International) issued October 2000
107
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Speed Dial Index
Description
For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 194 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 257 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“System Speed Dial” on page 305 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
To set SSD index using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 02.
8102-
3. Press the HOLD key.
SSD Assignment displays
4. Enter 2.
2
5. Press the HOLD key.
:
SSD Index displays
Enter Index # displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the SSD Index number (1 - 2).
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = SSD bin number)
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Enter the SSD Index name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
95.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
108
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.
• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next SSD index number displays
13. To set additional SSD index names, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
SSD.
Desired SSD index number displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all SSD indexes are entered.
15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
Enter SSD # displays
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Speed Dial Names
Description
For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 194 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 257 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“System Speed Dial” on page 305 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
109
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
To set SSD names using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 02.
8102-
3. Press the HOLD key.
SSD Assignment displays
4. Enter 1.
1
5. Press the HOLD key.
:
SSD Name displays
Enter SSD # displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = SSD bin number)
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Enter the SSD name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
95.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.
• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next SSD bin number displays
13. To set additional SSD names, press the volume up or down
key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired SSD.
Desired SSD bin number displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all SSD names are entered.
110
15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
Enter SSD # displays
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Speed Dial Numbers
Description
For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 194 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 257 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“System Speed Dial” on page 305 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
To set SSD numbers:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 02.
8102-
3. Press the HOLD key.
SSD Assignment displays
0
4. Press the HOLD key.
:
SSD Number displays
Enter SSD # displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
-SSDXXX
XXX displays (where
XXX = SSD bin number)
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the SSD digits to be dialled.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear an entry or any existing
data.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next SSD bin number displays
10. To set additional SSD numbers, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
SSD.
Desired SSD bin number displays
11. Repeat steps 8-10 until all SSDs are entered.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ICX-50-700
ON/OFF LED goes off
ICX (International) issued October 2000
111
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Text Message Replies
Description
This menu item specifies reply text messages.
Operation
To set Text Message Replies using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 11.
8111-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Text Message displays
4. Enter 1.
8111-1 :
5. Press the HOLD key.
Reply Message displays
Enter Msg # displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the Message number (0-9).
ABCDEF
8. Press the HOLD key.
X
displays (where X = Reply Text Message number)
9. Enter the Text Message (up to 15 characters):
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
95.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.
112
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.
• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired Text Message.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next message number displays
13. To set additional text Messages, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
Send Text Message.
Desired Text Message displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all Text Message Replies are
entered.
15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
Enter Msg # displays
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Verified Account Codes
Description
(For a description of Verified Account Codes, see “Verified Account Codes” on page 123.)
You can enter up to 500 Verified Account codes. The System will store them in memory as valid
codes. Once the codes are entered here, a Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class of
Service (COS) can be used with each code. You can then enter your code on someone else’s phone to
bypass the TRS (Call Barring) restrictions on that phone. (The TRS (Call Barring) assigned to the
Verified Account code will override the phone’s TRS.)
Operation
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
113
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
To set the Verified Account code:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 04.
8104-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Verified ACCD displays
Table Number displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Enter the Verified Account table number (001-500).
XXX-
6. Press the HOLD key.
Verified ACCD displays (where XXX
= account code table number)
0001 : AAAAAAAAAAA
7. Press the HOLD key.
XXX:Account Code displays (where
AAAAAAAAAAA = current account
code and XXX = account code table
number)
8. Enter up to ten-digit Verified Account Code. (All Verified
Account Codes must be unique. If there is a matching entry
entered, the System will not accept the entry and will double
beep.)
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R
key.
0002 :X
9. Press the HOLD key.
XXX:TRS Class displays (where X =
TRS Class)
10. Enter the TRS (Call Barring) Class to be associated with
the Verified Account Code entry.
11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
0001 :YYY displays (where YYY = the
next account code table number)
12. To add additional Verified Account numbers, press the
volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to
the desired Verified Account table number.
Desired Verified Account table number
displays
13. Repeat steps 8-12 until all Verified Account numbers are
entered.
14. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode
15. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
114
Table Number
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes
Description
You can assign Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes for each extension.
Operation
To set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes using either a large-display or small-display
phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 79.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 08.
8108-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Walking TRS Cod displays
Walking ID-Ext displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Dial the extension number.
Walking ID XXX displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the 4-digit Walking TRS (Call Barring) Code.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
9. To set additional extension Walking TRS (Call Barring)
Codes, press the volume up and down key or press the
HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.
10. Repeat steps 8-10 until all extension are entered.
11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
115
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
This page intentionally left blank.
116
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
This chapter describes Key telephone features. Key telephones are proprietary digital phones that
provide feature access through a combination of feature keys and access codes.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Key Telephone
120
Absence Message
120
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes
122
Attendant Group Calls
123
123
124
Auto Repeat Dial
125
Background Music
126
Busy Override
127
Callback Request
128
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding-All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb
129
Call Hold
System Hold
Floating Hold
Exclusive Hold
Broker’s Hold
Call Park
129
130
131
132
133
133
134
135
135
136
133
Call Hold
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup
Trunk Group Pickup
Trunk Direct Pickup
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
Unsupervised Transfer
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
139
140
140
141
142
Caller ID Call Log
142
143
143
144
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
149
Conference Calls
151
Directory Numbers
153
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
117
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
Display Information
Caller ID Display Information
Large-Display Phone
Small-Display Phone
Changing the Display Contrast
118
Page
157
Do-Not-Disturb
157
158
159
159
159
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
161
DSS/72 Console
161
EM/24 Console
162
Flash
162
Flexible Function Keys
163
Handsfree Answerback
169
Handsfree Operation
170
Headset Operation
170
Hot Dial Pad
171
Hot Line
172
Intercom Calling
172
Last Number Redial
173
Line Appearances
DSS/BLF Appearances
DIL Appearances
MCO Appearances
174
Message Key
174
175
176
177
Message Waiting/Callback
178
Mute Function
179
Offhook Monitor
180
Offhook Signalling
180
Offhook Voice Announce
181
One-Touch Keys
184
Onhook Dialling
185
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
186
Ringing Line Preference
187
188
Room Monitoring
188
Silent Monitor
190
Speed Dialling
Personal Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Speed Dial Linking
192
192
194
196
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Topic
Speed Dial Name Assignments
Page
Station Lockout
197
202
Step Call (Reset Call)
204
Timed Reminder Call
205
Trunk Access
Trunk Key Access
Direct Trunk Access
MCO Line Preference
MCO Trunk Access
206
Trunk Queuing
206
207
207
208
209
Universal Night Answer to Page
210
Variable Mode
210
Voice Recognition
212
Volume Control
213
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
214
Zip Mode
215
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
119
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Key Telephone
As an example of a key telephone, Figure 2 illustrates the Panasonic model VB-44225/VBD411LDSUK. This model provides a large display that includes one-touch access to speed dial
numbers, telephone features, and Help screens.
Figure 2.
Large Display Key Telephone
Absence Message
Description
Extension users can leave text messages on their phones when they are away. When the unattended
extension is dialed, the text message displays on the caller’s phone. Any one of the following
messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 have no default message text. All the messages can be
changed through system programming.
Beginning with Version 5.0, an LED lamp on the Absence Message key will light red when this
feature is active.
120
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Table 14. Absence Messages
Message No.
Message Text
Message No.
Message Text
0
In Meeting
5
Absence_No_5
1
At Lunch
6
Absence_No_6
2
Out of Office
7
Absence_No_7
3
Vacation
8
Absence_No_8
4
Another Office
9
Absence_No_9
Optionally, a return time can be input. Example Return Times for Absence Messages include
Input
Display
No input
Return
9
Return 9:00
11
Return 11:00
615
Return 6:15
1035
Return 10:35
Operation
To set an Absence Message
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729 [UK/HK]
or 729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Enter Msg Code # displays
3. Enter the Absence Message number. (See Table 14 above.)
Enter XXXX Hold
In Meeting displays
4. If desired, enter the 4-digit returning time.
Absence message displays
5. Press HOLD key.
ABS MSG Accepted displays; LED
lamp lights red on Absence Message key
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel an Absence Message
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default =729 [UK/HK] or
729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Enter MSG Code displays
3. Press HOLD key.
ABS MSG Cleared displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
121
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
Calling parties without a display get a ring back tone, rather than the Absence Message.
If a message code number that has not been programmed is selected, Absence No.n, appears on
the display (n = message number).
Regardless of setting an Absence Message on a DDI/DL extension, DDI/DL calls are routed
according to the trunk ringing setting.
An absence message may also be cancelled by dialling 7**. This cancels Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
and Call Forwarding-All Calls as well.
Account Codes
Description
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers
called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the System
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) record.
In addition verified account codes may be used to change the TRS (Call Barring) level to allow calls
to numbers otherwise restricted.
Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.
This feature works with SMDR (Call Logging). During a phone call, a station user can silently enter
an accounting or client billing code. The entered Code will display on the phone’s LCD as it’s dialled,
so the user can tell it’s being registered. Then later, the Call Logging reports will show the Code
dialled for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.
There are two different types of account codes: Non-Verified and Verified Account Codes. Prior to
Version 5.0, the maximum amount of account code numbers for both types could range from 1-10
digits. Beginning with Version 5.0, a second mode has been added that allows the user to set the
maximum amount of account code numbers from 1-4 digits. An account code error will occur when
more than the maximum number of digits are entered.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Codes aren’t checked by the system for validity. Depending on the setting, the user can
enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced
Account Codes (the user must enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can
enter a code, but doesn’t have to, for each call).
Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and/or outgoing calls. For incoming calls,
the user can enter the Code anytime during the call. For outgoing calls, the user either enters the Code
before accessing an outside line (for forced Codes), or anytime during the call (for voluntary Codes).
Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a code that has been preprogrammed into
an Account Code Table. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10
digits. These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program these codes with their own
122
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class assignment so that, when entered, they will
override the extension’s TRS (Call Barring) Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float”
from phone to phone, placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code
before making a call.)
You can assign Non-verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls. To assign an
account code to an outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call or during the call.
To assign an account code to an incoming call, you enter the account code during the call.
Operation
To enter an account code before making a call:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).
Enter Account # displays
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
Specified account code displays
4. Press the # key.
Specified account code # displays
5. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a Trunk Access Code
(default = 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
CO Trunk Key LED lights
6. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
To enter an account code during an outside call:
Action
Result
1. During a call, press the MEMORY key.
2. Press the # key.
Enter Account # displays
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
Specified account code displays
4. Press the # key.
Display returns to call state.
Verified Account Codes
Stations restricted from outside call origination by TRS (Call Barring) can be allowed to make
outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS (Call Barring). After a call is
made, the Call Logging record for the call will show the verified account code.
Operation
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
123
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To make an outside call that requires an account code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).
Enter Account # displays
3. Enter the Account Code (10 digits max.).
Specified code displays
4. Press the # key.
Specified account code # displays
5. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a Trunk Access Code
(default = 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
CO Trunk Key LED lights
6. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
An Call Logging printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code
records.
Considerations
•
•
•
Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.
Account codes will be cancelled after using trunk queuing.
Account Codes interact with TRS (Call Barring) as shown in the following table:
Forced or Not Forced
Verified or
Non-Verified
Not Forced
Non-Verified
TRS (Call Barring) Class
No Account Entry
Account Entry
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
Forced
Non-Verified
Verified
Account Code Based TRS
Class
TRS (Call Barring) Class
for Forced Account Code
(FF1 0 19 0001)
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Account Code Based TRS
Class
Attendant Group Calls
CPC-96, CPC-288, and CPC-576 All Versions
Description
You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialling the designated attendant number.
124
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To call an attendant group:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0 [UK/HK] or 9
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Call Attendant displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.
The attendant pilot number is flexible.
If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant
group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialled.
Auto Repeat Dial
Description
If you press the FL/R key while receiving busy tone on an outside call, the System automatically
redials the number. The System continues to redial the number at set intervals until the called number
answers, the caller hangs up, or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made.
Operation
To use Auto Repeat Dial:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a Trunk Access Code
(default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or
or 81-84).
Trunk key LED lights
3. Dial the phone number.
• Dialled phone number displays
• Busy tone
4. Press the FL/R key.
System automatically redials number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
125
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Background Music
Description
If your System is set up to provide Background Music, music can be played from the speakers of idle
telephones. If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music, the music stops and the
phone rings. Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook.
The System can also provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) using a separate music source (except with
CPC-HS). If MOH is provided, callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold. (For
more information on MOH, see page 49.)
Operation
To turn Background Music on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
BGM ON displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To turn Background Music off:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
BGM OFF displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.
Important: A license may be required from the Society of Composers, Authors,
and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded
music through the MOH and/or Background Music feature. Panasonic, its distributors, and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment
fail to obtain such a license.
Considerations
•
126
N/A
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Busy Override
Description
Busy Override allows you to break into another user’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent
information or to create three-party conference calls.
Operation
To break into a call with a line appearance on your phone (Trunk Key Busy Override):
Action
1. Press the lit direct trunk key.
Result
• Alert tone sounds to both phones (System programming required)
• Connected to both parties
To use Extension Busy Override:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Dialled extension number displays
• Busy tone
3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9 [UK/HK] or 9#
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• Alert tone sounds to both extensions
(System programming required)
• Connection to both parties
• OVR1: (name of overriding extension) and OVR2: (extension name
for current talk path) displays on
both extensions
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
The default for the Override Alert Tone is off. If the Override Alert Tone is enabled, the tone will
be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
Beginning with Version 4.0 and higher, certain extensions can be excluded from busy override
based on Class of Service.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
127
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Callback Request
Description
If you dial a busy extension, Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that
extension becomes free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.
Operation
To set a Callback Request:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Dialled extension number displays
• Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or
3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Ringback tone
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
System calls back when called extension
becomes free
To respond to a callback request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
System automatically redials extension
To cancel a Callback Request (Version 3.0 and higher):
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Callback cancellation code (default = 769 [UK/HK]
or 769# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Replace the handset .
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
•
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan (Callback Cancel)
Considerations
•
128
N/A
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to Voice
Mail. Call Forwarding can be set or cancelled under the following conditions from either your own
extension or from an alternate extension:
•
•
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls
When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately
forwarded. Beginning with Version 5.0, a Flexible Function key can be programmed so that the LED
indicates when this feature is active. The LED will light red when Call Forwarding-All Calls is set.
To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 721 (UK/HK) or 721# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 741 (UK/HK) or 741# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For information, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
129
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 751 (UK/HK) or 751# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - Busy
When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 722 (UK/HK) or 722# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 742 (UK/HK) or 742# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you want to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For information, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
130
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 732 (UK/HK) or 732# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 752 (UK/HK) or 752# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call Forward - No Answer timer
expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 723 (UK/HK) or 723# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 743 (UK/HK) or 743# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Dial the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For information, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
131
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 733 (UK/HK) or 733# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 753 (UK/HK) or 753# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb
The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your
own extension in one step.
Operation
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls and DND:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the CF-All/DND Clear code (default = 7**).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
132
Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated.
(For example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.
If forwarding to an outside number, the destination number must be pre-programmed into a
System Speed Dial (SSD) code.
Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.
You can set Call Forwarding - All Calls while Call Forwarding - No Answer and/or Call
Forwarding - Busy are set. Cancelling one mode only affects that mode; however, the other
modes will remain set until cancelled individually.
An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A
manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.
If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call
Forward No Answer destination.
You can cancel both Call Forwarding-All Calls and DND by entering 7 * *.
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Beginning with Version 4.0 and higher, calls can be forwarded by an extension with an NPDN or
PNPDN if the COS gives permission. See “Directory Numbers” on page 153 for more
information.
Call Hold
Description
The System provides the following types of Call Hold or Call Park:
•
System Hold
•
Floating Hold
•
Exclusive Hold
•
Broker’s Hold
•
Station Call Park
System Hold
You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on
System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.
Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
• Intercom dial tone
• Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX
= outside line number)
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from the extension that placed it there:
Action
Result
1. Press the line key that is flashing green or press the HOLD
key if a non-appearing trunk call.
CO XXX displays (where XXX = outside
line number)
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from an extension other than the one that put
it there:
Action
1. Press the line key that is flashing red.
ICX-50-700
Result
CO XXX displays (where XXX = outside
line number)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
133
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code (default = *0).
Enter TRK # displays
3. Enter the trunk number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Floating Hold
Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension that
has an FF key assigned to the same Floating Hold orbit where the call is held. You can also retrieve a
call by dialling the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call.
Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page. The call can
be placed in a Floating Hold “orbit” and that orbit number announced during the page. The paged
party can then pick up the call by dialling the orbit number or by pressing an FF key assigned to that
orbit number.
Note: To place a call on Floating Hold, you should have at least one FF key assigned to a Floating
Hold orbit number (001-576).
Operation
To place a call on Floating Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the Floating FF key (system programming required) or press the HOLD key.
Result
• Intercom dial tone
• Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX
= outside line number)
To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:
Action
1. (A) Press the FF key assigned to the Floating Hold orbit
number where the call is held.
Result
CO XXX displays if line released (where
XXX = outside line number)
OR...
(A) Enter the Floating Hold Answer feature access code
(default = *9).
(B) Enter the Floating Hold orbit number (001-576) CPC288/576), 01-96 (CPC-96) or 001-099 (CPC-288/576) or
01-09 (CPC-96) (See considerations below.)
134
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The number of floating hold orbits available may very depending on the Station/Floating Park
Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025). The call pickup access code can set to *9 (default). The
“*9” access code operates as follows:
System Size
Virtual Line Number and Operation
01-09: Floating Hold pick up
10-96: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose
001-099: Floating Hold pick up
100-576: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose
96
Above 96
Exclusive Hold
With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used
to hold trunk calls and extension calls.
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the trunk key used for the call or press
the HOLD key.
Result
• Intercom dial tone
• Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX
= outside line number)
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Action
1. Press the trunk key on which the call is held.
Result
• Trunk LED stops flashing, remains
green
• CO XXX displays if call released
(where XXX = outside line number)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key.
Broker’s Hold
Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the
HOLD key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
135
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To place a call on Broker’s Hold:
Action
Result
1. Pick up the first call.
2. Press the HOLD key.
First call on hold
3. Pick up the second call.
4. Press the HOLD key.
Second call on hold, first call retrieved
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
In order to use Broker’s Hold with trunk calls, the first call must have a possible appearance and
non-appearance, but in the case of appearance, the first call must be one of trunk key.
Call Park
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient
of the call.
Trunk, Extension, and Network calls may be parked.
There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the ICX . One way is to park the call at the
receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialling the park answer
code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial
the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call. Beginning with Version 5.0,
the user may park the call at another extension by pressing the BLF key. In addition, an Extension
Group Pickup code allows the user to pick up a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing calls), a Hold
Recall, and a Station Park Recall.
To park a call on this extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
• Current call on hold
• CO HOLD #XX displays (where XX =
trunk number)
2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default = 771 [UK/
HK] or 771# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) or press the
PARK HOLD key.
Accepted ST-Park displays
3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
136
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default
= 773 [UK/HK] or 733# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Result
Intercom dial tone
Enter Park EXT # displays
OR...
Enter the Call Park/Floating Hold Answer feature access
code (default = *9). (Version 3.0 and higher)
2. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
• CO TALK TRK #XX displays (where
XX = line number)
• Connected to parked call
To park a call at another extension:
Action
1. Press the HOLD key.
Result
• Current call on hold
• CO HOLD #XX displays (where XX =
trunk number)
2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default = 774
[UK/HK] or 774# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Enter TRNS EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call,
Park (ext#) displays on lower display
OR
Press the BLF key
4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a transferred call park:
Action
Result
1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default = 772
[UK/HK] or 772# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• CO TALK TRK #XX displays (where
XX = line number)
• Connected to parked call
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
You cannot park more than one call at a time.
Call Park functions can be assigned to FF keys (see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 163).
No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone.
A Call Park Answer key may not be assigned to the EM/24 or DSS/72 console.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
137
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
•
•
•
•
•
If a call is parked by Call Park key, the LED flashes.
LCD softkeys are also available for Call Park.
Once a call is parked, it cannot be accessed by the trunk key or direct trunk access (similar to
exclusive hold).
If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held
call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the
parked call.
Depending on the Station/Floating Park Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025), the call pickup
access code can set to *9 (default), 773 (UK/HK), or 773# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia). The
“*9” access code operates as follows:
System Size
96
Above 96
138
Section 700 - Operation
Virtual Line Number and Operation
01-09: Floating Hold pick up
10-96: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose
001-099: Floating Hold pick up
100-576: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Call Pickup
Description
The System allows the following types of call pickup:
•
Extension Group Pickup
•
Extension Direct Pickup
•
Trunk Group Pickup
•
Trunk Direct Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup
group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.
Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:
•
Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension
group.
•
Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own
extension group.
•
Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension
group.
Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default
= 701 [UK/HK] or 701# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code
(default = 702 [UK/HK] or 702# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
139
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To use Specified Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703 [UK/
HK] or 703# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the
call is ringing.
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
Extension Group Pickup - 12 / CCU - maximum 72 group / 6 CCU configuration
The Call Pickup Group assignments determine the order calls are picked up (i.e. if two calls are
ringing in the call pickup group, the call ringing the first member will be picked up first).
Extension Direct Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialling the number of
the ringing extension.
Operation
To use Extension Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704
[UK/HK] or 704# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Group Pickup
Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO
incoming trunk group.
140
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To use Trunk Group Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code (default = 709 [UK/
HK] or 709# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Extension number or outside phone
number displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Direct Pickup
Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number.
Operation
To use Trunk Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code (default = *0).
3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system) trunk.
Outside number displays
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Calls in Exclusive Hold cannot be picked up.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
141
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Call Transfer
Description
The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The
transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to
transfer a call to a busy extension.)
Supervised Transfer
When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party
answers, then he/she announces the call.
Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
Talk-EXT Name or Number displays
4. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key if using DSS/72).
To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Seize a trunk line and dial the number to which the call is to
be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
Talk-EXT XXX displays (where XXX =
extension)
4. Complete the transfer:
Original call LED light turns red
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key is using DSS/72).
142
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Unsupervised Transfer
When completing an unsupervised transfer, the transferring party hangs up before the third party
answers.
Operation
To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key if using DSS/72).
To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a trunk access code
(default = 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key is using DSS/72).
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
Operation
To camp a call onto a busy extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
143
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-on activated,
enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/
HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indondesia]).
Result
Camp-on tone heard at the called extension
4. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key is using DSS/72).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
If On-Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service (COS),
he/she must press the PROG or RELEASE key before hanging up to complete the transfer.
•
If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call
will recall to the transferring extension.
•
Beginning with Version 5.0, a Transfer Recall (only non-appearing calls) may be answered on
another extension using the Call Pickup feature. However, an incoming Transfer Recall cannot
be picked up during conversation.
•
If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert
to the Attendant group.
•
If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.
•
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.
•
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call
will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension
221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to
extension 225.
•
Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.
•
If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension, the call will camp on to the busy
extension.
•
To transfer to a outside party, it is best to use supervised transfer. If the trunk-to-trunk on-hook
transfer restriction is enabled, a blind transfer will result in the loss of the second call but the
second call will be kept on hold. If not enabled and the second outside party is busy, the
transferred party will receive busy.
Caller ID Call Log
Description
(Note: Analog Caller ID is not available in the UK, TX, or EX model).
144
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
The Call Log keeps a record of Caller ID calls to individual phones. The Call Log allows you to view
Caller ID calls that have been sent to your phone and, if desired, return a call.
The following table shows maximum number of extensions that may have call logs and the number of
entries.
Table 15. Call log maximums
Call Log Maximums
Maximum
Maximum number of extensions with Call Log
20 per CCU
Number of log entries that can be stored for an extension. (After the call
log fills with 10 entries, each additional entry overwrites the oldest log
entry.)
10
The Call Log stores information for Caller ID calls that ring a phone. If the phone does not ring (for
instance when Call Forward - All Calls is active), there is no entry in the Call Log for that call.
Each Call Log entry includes the following call information:
•
•
•
•
Calling number
Time and date
Whether the call was answered
How the call was routed.
The most recent entries are stored first in the Call Log.
Call Log Operation on a Small Display Key Telephone
Operation
To view the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
4. Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing the ON/
OFF key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
145
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Example Caller ID Call Log (Small Display Telephone):
Call Result
08:30 Fri Oct 24
(blank) - Answered
- Calling Party
Hung Up
Time and Date of Call
Calling Number
01:2015553678
- Answered by
Someone Else
Call Log Entry Number (01 - 10)
To outdial from the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
4. To return a call, (and exit the Call Log):
Press the left EXEC key to access Access MCO 1 (dial 9
[UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Indonesia, Malaysia]), dial add
digits if required (usually “1” in USA only), and dial the
displayed caller ID number.
OR...
Press the right EXEC key (soft key) to access Access
MCO 1 (dial 9 [UK/HK] or 0 ]Taiwan, Indonesia, Malaysia]), and dial the caller ID number.
To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
4. To store the call log number in a personal speed dial:
Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99)
and press the left EXEC key (to dial the add digits, usually
an area code) and press the HOLD key.
OR...
Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99)
and press the right EXEC key (soft key) and press the
HOLD key.
146
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key Telephone
Operation
To view the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
NEXT - View the next 5 calls
PREV - View the previous 5 calls
4. Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing the ON/
OFF key.
Example Caller ID Call Log (Large Display Telephone):
Call Log Entry Number (01 - 10)
Call Result
(blank) - Answered
- Calling Party
Hung Up
- Answered by
Someone Else
Time and Date
of Call
08:30 Fri Oct 24
01:2015553678
Calling Number
01:2015553678
02:2015554444
03:2015553456
04:4045554321
05:4045557654
To outdial from the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
147
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
NEXT - View the next 5 calls
PREV - View the previous 5 calls
4. To return a call, (and exit the Call Log)
Press the Soft key to the left of the desired number to
access Access MCO 1 (dial 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia]), dial add digits if required (in USA
only, usually “1” ), and dial the displayed caller ID #.
OR...
Press the Soft key to the right of the desired number to
access MCO 1 (dial 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia,
Indonesia]), and dial the caller ID #.
To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
NEXT - View the next 5 calls
PREV - View the previous 5 calls
4. To store the call log number in a personal speed dial:
Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99)
and press the left Soft key (to dial the add digits, usually an
area code) and press the HOLD key.
OR...
Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99)
and press the right Soft key and press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
•
•
Caller ID daughter circuit card on the Loop Start Trunk Card if a Loop Start Trunk receives the
call.
ISDN (PRI-T Point) if ISDN card receives the call.
Large Display Telephone or 44-Series Small Display Telephone.
Considerations
•
•
148
Caller ID is available ISDN PRI.
Caller ID circuit card must be installed and enabled. (See “Caller ID” on page 29).
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Caller ID is typically 10 digits. If the local calling area requires 7-digit dialling, the call log
outdialling will not operate properly.
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the
called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be
automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the
first call on hold and then answer the waiting call.
The System provides two types of call waiting:
•
Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to
the busy extension. You need only to remain on the line.
•
Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy
extension.
You can leave a text message that displays on the busy phone. Any one of the following messages can
be selected. Messages 6 to 9 and 0 have no default message text. All the messages can be changed
through system programming. (See “Set Text Message Replies” on page 112 for more information on
setting Send Text Messages).
Table 16. Send Text Messages
Message No.
Message Text
Message No.
Message Text
1
Visitor Here
6
User Defined
2
Need Help
7
User Defined
3
Important
8
User Defined
4
Urgent
9
User Defined
5
Emergency
0
User Defined
The busy party can reply with a text message that displays on the camping on phone. Any one of the
following messages can be selected. Messages 6 to 9 and 0 have no default message text. All the
messages can be changed through system programming. (See “Set Text Message Replies” on page
112 for more information on setting Text Message Replies).
Table 17. Text Message Replies
Message No.
ICX-50-700
Message Text
Message No.
Message Text
1
Take A Message
6
User Defined
2
Please Hold
7
User Defined
3
Will Call Back
8
User Defined
4
Transfer
9
User Defined
5
Unavailable
0
User Defined
ICX (International) issued October 2000
149
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To use Automatic Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Wait XXX displays (where XXX =
extension number/name)
• Called party hears alert tone from the
speaker.
• Calling party hears ringback tone
3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To use Manual Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/
HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indondesia]).
• Wait XXX displays (where XXX =
extension number/name)
• Called party hears alert tone from the
speaker
• Calling party hears ringback tone
4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To leave a text message while camped-on:
Action
Result
1. Press the MSG FF key.
2. Enter the Send Text Message number (1-9, 0). (See Table 16
on page 149 for the send text messages.)
The send text message appears on the
busy telephone display.
To reply to a text message:
Action
Result
1. Press the MSG FF key.
2. Enter the Reply Text Message number (1-9, 0). See Table 17
on page 149 for the text message replies.)
150
The text message reply appears on the
camped on telephone display.
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key again to be connected to the waiting call.
• Current call placed on hold
• Connected to waiting call
OR....
Press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “To camp a call onto a
busy extension:” on page 143.
•
Manual camp-on to a busy extension will not Call Forward/No Answer.
•
Automatic camp-on to a busy extension will Call Forward/No Answer.
•
Calls transfered to a busy extension will Call Forward.
•
Text message send and text message reply requires display Key Telephones. Also, Text Message
Send and Text Message Reply keys must be programmed on the telephones.
Conference Calls
Description
Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard
system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the
optional Conference Card is installed, up to 8 parties can participate in a conference call.
The Version 3.0 software release allows any combination of extensions and trunk lines to be in the
conference as long as the original extension is in the conference and the total number of parties does
not exceed 8. With Version 3.0 software, only one operation is used to establish and add to a
conference. You simply have to place the current call on hold, dial the next party and press the CONF
key. No different operation or access code is required to add additional parties to the call.
When no optional conference card is installed, the system supports the following types of three-party
conference calls:
•
3 extensions
•
2 extensions and 1trunk line
•
1 extension and 2 trunk lines
When the optional 8-party conference card is installed, the system supports any combination of
conference calls, except all outside lines.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
151
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To establish a conference call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key or the line key of your
current call.
Extension number, outside line number,
or name of held party displays
2. If adding an outside party, press a vacant trunk key, or dial a
trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call.
Dialed number displays
4. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
CNF1:CO XXX or EXT XXX and
CNF2:CO YYY or EXT YYY displays
(where XXX = first party and YYY = second party)
• CO #XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
5. To add additional parties, repeat steps 1-4
6. For 3-party Conference Call Only:
To release a conference member, press PROG + 1 to
release conference member 1 or press PROG + 2 to release
conference member 2, etc.
(Available up to 3-party conference. Not
available for 4-party or more conferencing)
Note: The conference member numbers are shown on the
display.
7. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.
(See ** Consideration below)
To establish a two-party private conversation from a 3-party conference:
Action
152
Result
1. While on a call, press the CONF + 1 (2) to have a private
conversation with the CNF 1 (2) party as shown on the display.
You and the selected party are in a separate conversation from the other conference parties.
2. To reestablish the conference, press CONF.
CNF1:CO XXX or EXT XXX and
CNF2:CO YYY or EXT YYY displays
(where XXX = first party and YYY = second party)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To remove a Busy Tone (Hang up) from an 8-party conference:
Action
Result
1. During an conference with more than 3 parties, press
CONF + (n) (where n is the number 1-7 for the conference
parties) to individually select a conference party.
The other party is placed on hold.
2. If you did not select the conference party that is giving busy
tone, re-enter the conference by pressing the CONF key.
CONF Members: X (where X = 4-7
party conference) displays
3. If you selected the conference party that is giving busy tone,
hang up and then go off-hook again and press the CONF
key to re-enter the conference call.
CONF Members: Y (where Y = 4-6
party conference) displays
Hardware Requirements
•
A Conference Card (VB-44120) must be installed in the System in order to conference more than
three parties.
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
**If all the internal parties hang up, the conference call will be disconnected. If the internal party
remains in the conversation, the conference call remains in progress.
When three parties are conferenced, a built-in 3-party conference circuit is used. If no 3-party
conference circuit is available, a conference cannot be established.
When a fourth party is added, the conference is moved to a conference circuit on the 8-party
conference card. If an 8-party conference circuit is not available, a fourth party cannot be added
to a conference.
Once an 8-party conference circuit is used, it continues to be used as long as the conference
continues.
An 8-party conference card supports up to four 8-party conference circuits. However, the card
must be placed in cabinet slots 1, 5, or 9 to support more than one 8-party conference circuit (and
jumpered accordingly).
Directory Numbers
Description
A Directory Number (DN) allows extension numbers to be used on a key basis. The same DN may be
assigned to multiple keys on the same telephone and to keys on other telephones.
When a telephone’s extension number is assigned to a key on the same telephone, it is considered a
Primary Directory Number (PDN). Up to three appearances of the PDN may be assigned to keys on a
key telephone. This allows for multiple calls on the same DN.
When a DN is assigned to an FF key on another telephone, it is considered a Non-Primary Directory
Number (NPDN). Up to three NPDN appearances of the same DN may be assigned to keys on a
telephone. This allows calls to the DN to appear on multiple telephones. The calls ring in on a
specified basis - immediate, delayed, or no-ring.
A telephone may only have one PDN (on up to three keys) but may have multiple NPDNs with up to
three appearances of any one NPDN.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
153
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
In Version 4.0 and higher, directory numbers may be assigned to stations that are not installed,
provided the cabinet is installed. However, once the directory numbers have been assigned to a
particular slot, that slot is no longer available.
Figure 3.
Example Directory Number assignments for Extension 200
When a caller originates a call, the call appears on the first available PDN key. If all PDNs are
unavailable, the call will select the INT LED.
When calls come in to a DN, the call appears on the first available DN key. If the call is to your PDN
and no PDN key is available, the call appears on the INT LED.
Directory numbers may be assigned to FF keys 25-32. These are non-appearing keys.
Intercom voice calls only go to the PDN extension but light the corresponding NPDN keys red. A tone
call follows the appropriate ring status (immediate ring, delayed ring, etc.) for any extension.
To originate a call using a Primary Directory Number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
The first available PDN key lights.
154
2. If dialling an outside call, dial the outside line group access
code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number or extension number.
Dialed number displays
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To receive a call to a Directory Number (PDN or NPDN):
Action
1. If ringing, go off-hook or press the green blinking PDN or
NPDN key.
Result
The PDN or NPDN key lights.
If not ringing, press the red blinking PDN or NPDN key.
To originate a call using a Non-Primary Directory Number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
The first available PDN key lights.
2. Press the desired NPDN key.
Intercom dial tone
The NPDN key lights.
3. If dialling an outside call, dial the outside line group access
code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
• Outside dial tone
4. Dial the phone number or extension number.
Dialed number displays
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
To receive a call using a Non-Primary Directory Number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the desired NPDN key.
The NPDN key lights.
The call is received.
To call a Primary Directory Number extension (NPDNs not called):
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
The first available PDN key lights.
2. Enter the Direct Call to PDN access code (default = 766
[UK/HK] or 766# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
155
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To transfer a call to the Primary Directory Number extension (NPDNs not called):
Action
1. Place the current call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Direct Call to PDN access code (default =766
[UK/HK] or 766# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number.
Dialed number displays
4. If desired, wait until the PDN Extension answers and introduce the call.
5. Hang up.
To set Call Forwarding All, Busy, or No Answer for a PDN from an NPDN or PNPDN:
Version 4.0 and higher
Action
1. Press an NPDN (or PNPDN) key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the access code for Call Forwarding (Direct = 721),
(Busy = 722), (No Answer = 723).
3. Dial the Call Forward Destination extension number.
Note:
Dialed number displays
FF1-0-03: NPDN and PNPDN Call Forwarding Programming Address
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
A DN can be assigned as a member of a hunt group.
•
DNs are not available for ISDN S-Point, pilot numbers of hunting groups, Voice Mail, ACD, API
and for the Attendant group.
A PDN must be assigned to a telephone before a corresponding NPDN can be used.
•
•
TRS Class and ARS Routing is determined on an extension port basis regardless of the DN
accessed.
•
Busy Override is available to the PDN conversation, but not available to the NPDN conversation.
•
Do-Not-Disturb (DND) can only be set through the PDN, but cannot be set through the NPDN.
•
Timed Reminder (Alarm Setting) is set through the PDN, but cannot be set through the NPDN.
•
Offhook Voice Announce is available to PDN conversation, but not available to the NPDN
conversation.
•
The appearance of incoming trunk calls have the following priority if the keys are set to the same
extension:
•
•
•
•
156
Trunk/Floating Hold Key
MCO Key
DN Key
Non-Appearance
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Display Information
Description
Key telephones with a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) reflect the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day and time (in 12 or 24 hour format)
Callback requests from other extensions
Caller ID information
Extension number
Extension calling party name
Extension called party status
Trunk call duration
Trunk number
Trunk name
Display telephones can also display Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Directories, System Speed Dial (SSD)
Directories, and Extension Directories, along with various other information such as the Set/Cancel
status of different features and callback messages from other extensions.
Examples of large- and small-display phones are shown in the following illustrations.
Caller ID Display Information
Prior to Version 4.0, the telephone would not display Caller ID information for an extension that was
in use when a call was received. In Version 4.0 or higher, Caller ID information is displayed on the
second line of an LCD display when an incoming call is received during conversation. If a second
incoming call is from another extension, the LCD displays the extension name or number. If the
second incoming call is from an Exchange, the LCD displays the CID information transmitted from
the caller. Caller ID displays the second incoming call as follows:
Figure 5-4. Normal Incoming Caller ID Message (Exchange Line/Extension)
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
157
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Large-Display Phone
Figure 5.
Large-Display Main Menu (shown in default idle condition)
You can easily access and use many telephone features by pressing the soft key next to the desired
Main Menu item. These items include:
Personal Dial
Contains PSD numbers. To scroll through the PSD Directory, press the NEXT or PREV buttons
located beneath the display.
•
PSD speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial
directory. For information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialling” on page
192.
System Dial
Contains SSD numbers. To scroll through the SSD Directory, press the NEXT or PREV button
located beneath the display.
•
SSD numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory. For
information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.
Extension
Contains the Extension Directory (grouped alphabetically). To scroll through the Extension Directory,
press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display.
Function System
Provides easy access to most key telephone features, such as Call Forwarding, Do-Not-Disturb
(DND), Microphone Mute, Background Music, Call Pickup, Account Codes, Message Waiting /
Callback, Headset On/Off, Extension Port confirmation, etc.
To scroll through the list of items, press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display.
Function Ext
Allows you to assign frequently used telephone features for easy access. Most items found under
Function System can be assigned to the Function Ext area, in any order you desire. (For additional
information, see Section 400 - Programming.)
158
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Large-LCD Display During Idle
The large display telephone may optionally be set to return to a selected idle screen after the user goes
on-hook. If the Large-LCD Display During Idle setting (FF3 0 BSSC 04 11 HOLD) is set to 1 (allow),
after moving to the desired menu is displayed, the user may enter ON/OFF PROG ## ON/OFF to
select the menu as the idle menu.
Small-Display Phone
Figure 6.
Small-Display Menu (shown in default idle condition)
The Mode key and End key on a small-display phone allow you to change the software mode of the
display from Default (i.e., time and date) mode to Directory mode. While in Directory mode, you can
view SSD and PSD Directories and Extension Directories. You can dial a speed dial number or
extension by pressing the soft key next to the desired number. You can also use the soft keys to
execute programmed system features while in the Variable mode.
Notes:
•
•
•
The MODE key allows you to switch the display from Default to Directory mode. The END
key allows you to return the display to Default mode.
The soft keys allow you to view speed dial and extension directories and to dial a speed dial
number or extension while in the Directory mode.
Speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory.
For information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.
Variable Mode
Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys to access programmed features while your phone is in
the following states:
•
•
•
•
During an intercom call
During trunk dial tone
During a trunk call
After dialling a busy extension
Note: Variable Mode features required system programming.
Changing the Display Contrast
You can adjust the display contrast by pressing the VOLUME up or down key while the phone is idle.
Do-Not-Disturb
Description
You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND
is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
159
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or
720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
DND Accepted
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or
720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• DND/CD LED light goes off
• DND Cleared displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To set DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740
[UK/HK] or 740# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Enter DND EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number.
DND Set displays on affected extension
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750
[UK/HK] or 750# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Enter DND EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number.
DND Cleared displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
160
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
•
Forced DND override is available.
•
DND override function is available by Busy Override code.
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
Description
Dial Pulse (DP) to Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Signal Conversion allows you to switch from
DP to DTMF signalling when using a DP trunk. For instance, if you dial into a Voice Mail system
using a DP trunk, you can switch to DTMF signalling to communicate with the Voice Mail system.
The System can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and outgoing timers.
Operation
To switch from DP to DTMF dialling:
Action
Result
1. Press the * key or the # key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
DSS/72 Console
Description
The DSS/72 console is a 72-key console that can be attached to a key telephone. The 72 keys on the
DSS/72 can be programmed as Direct Station Select (DSS) keys for internal lines.
In addition to providing direct station selection, the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields (BLFs)
that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions. The LED lights red when the assigned
extension is busy, and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) are activated.
For additional information, see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 163.
Hardware Requirements
•
DSS/72 console (VB-D631uk [UK] or VB-44320 [HK, Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
161
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
Pressing a DSS key while connected to an outside line places the line on hold.
•
A maximum of 12 DSS/72 consoles can be connected to a 96-port system.
EM/24 Console
Description
The EM/24 is a 24-key console that can be attached to a key telephone. The 24 keys on the EM/24 can
be programmed as Direct Station Select (DSS) keys for internal lines.
In addition to providing direct station selection, the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields (BLFs)
that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions. The LED lights red when the assigned
extension is busy and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) are activated.
For additional information, see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 163.
Hardware Requirements
•
EM/24 console (VB-D631UK [UK] or VB-44320 [HK, Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])
Considerations
•
N/A
Flash
Description
You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically
reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FL/R or PROG
key.
Trunk programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to extension
dial tone status.
Note: The following is available for future use only: Alternatively, an extension setting
determines if pressing a trunk key will place the call on exclusive hold or send a flash to the trunk.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
162
You can send a longer or shorter flash signal, depending on whether you use the FL/R or PROG
key (flash tone lengths are set for the FL/R and PROG keys through system programming).
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Flexible Function Keys
Description
You can assign frequently used functions to programmable keys on key phones, DSS/72 consoles, and
EM/24 consoles. All keys not already assigned as line or speed dialling keys are available for
programming.
You can store either Fixed Feature codes or Flexible Feature codes in an FF key. (The LED of the
Flexible Function [FF] key will not light when digits are stored in the key.) Fixed Feature codes are
hard-coded and cannot be changed. Most features; however, can also be assigned flexible codes
according to the System Dial Plan. This allows the flexible codes to be changed in the dial plan
without having to re-program extensions.
When a flexible code is programmed into an FF key or soft key, the System translates the flexible
code into the fixed code. You can use either the Fixed Feature code or your System’s Flexible Feature
code when programming FF keys. Table 18 on page 165 reflects both Fixed Feature codes and the
System defaults for Flexible Feature codes.
Operation
To assign Fixed Feature codes to an FF key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
F displays
3. Press the FF key to be programmed.
Enter Function# displays
4. Press the FL/R key.
5. Enter the code to be programmed. (See Table 18 on page
165.)
Programmed code displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
Programmed function name displays
7. Repeat steps 2-6 to program additional keys.
8. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To assign Flexible Feature Codes to an FF key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
F displays
3. Press the FF key to be programmed.
Enter Function# displays
4. Enter the code to be programmed. (See Table 18 on page
165.)
Programmed code displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
Programmed function name displays
6. Repeat steps 2-5 to program additional keys.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
163
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To erase a code stored on an FF key:
Note: You cannot use the following procedure to clear FF keys that have been assigned as trunks.
Trunk keys can only be cleared through system programming.
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the FF key that was programmed.
Programmed code displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
Cleared Function displays
To check a programmed FF key (Display Phone Only):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the FF key to be checked.
Programmed data displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
If a new code is programmed into a key, the previously programmed code is erased.
•
FF keys assigned as trunks must be cleared using system programming before new FF
assignments can be made.
•
The System can be programmed so that MCO 1 Trunk Access calls automatically use Automatic
Route Selection (ARS).
•
The ANSWER key functions as listed in the table below.
Status
Idle
Off-Hook
Condition
Operation when ANSWER key is pressed
No incoming ring
Ignore.
Incoming ring
Monitor ON (speaker) - Auto Answer for incoming ring.
Off-hook signaling
Answer for off-hook signaling. Current conversation will be
put on hold automatically.
No off-hook signaling
Ignore.
Note: When the extension has 1 non-appearing trunk on hold and 1 non-appearing trunk at talk, ANSWER key
operation is ignored and you can’t put the 2nd non-appearing trunk on hold.
164
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
The RELEASE key functions as listed in the table below.
Status
Condition
Operation when RELEASE key is pressed
Idle
--
Ignore.
Monitor ON
(speaker) or Headset
Mode
Several held calls
Latest held call will be transferred; phone returns to idle status (Monitor OFF).
No held calls
Current call (talk) will be released; phone returns to idle status (Monitor OFF).
Several held calls
Latest held call will be transferred; phone gets internal dial
tone.
No held calls
Current call (talk) will be released; phone gets internal dial
tone.
Handset Off-Hook
Table 18. Feature access codes for FF key assignments
Note: TMI is the abbreviation for Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia.
Feature Description
REDIAL + Fixed Feature
Code + (additional digits to
program into key)
Trunk Key
# + (Trunk 1-576)
MCO Key
1 + (Auto-Select Pattern 1-5;
MCO-Incoming Trk Grp 00-99)
Virtual Port Key
Γ9 + (Virtual Port 001-576)
BLF/DSS Outgoing
9 + (Extension 0-9999)
BLF/DSS Immediate Ring
81 + (Extension 0-9999)
BLF Delayed Ring
82 + (Extension 0-9999)
BLF/DSS-No Ring
83+ (Extension 0-9999)
2-Way Box for CCU 1
61 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 2
62 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 3
63 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 4
64 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 5
65 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for CCU 6
66 + (box no.)
2-Way Retrieve Messages
5 + (box no.)
2-Way Access
Γ#50
2-Way End
Γ#51
2-Way Re-Record
Γ#52
2-Way Pause
Γ#53
2-Way Store
Γ#54
2-Way Add
Γ#55
2-Way Cancel
Γ#56
2-Way Notify
Γ#57
2-Way Copy
Γ#58
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
Default Flexible Feature Code
(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature
Code)
165
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Feature Description
REDIAL + Fixed Feature
Code + (additional digits to
program into key)
2-Way MF Send
Γ#59
ACD-1 Log-In/Out Button
Γ#80
ACD-1 Work Unit
Γ#81 + (Work Unit 00-99)
ACD-1 Unavailable Button
Γ#82
ACD-2 Log-In/Out Button
Γ#85
ACD-2 Work Unit
Γ#86 + (Work Unit 00-99)
ACD-2 Unavailable Button
Γ#87
Speed-Dial Send Button
Γ01 + (SSD or PSD)
(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature
Code)
80
Designated Trunk Access Button (for
Γ02
outgoing calls)
88
Γ03
89
Floating Hold Answer
Γ04
Call Park Pickup (Ver. 3.0 and higher)
Γ9
Verified ID Code Send
166
Default Flexible Feature Code
Priority Message-Waiting: Send
Γ05
Γ41
Priority Message-Waiting: Cancel
Γ06
Γ49
Message-Waiting: Cancel
Γ07
Γ5
Message-Waiting: Callback
Γ08
Γ6
Call Forward (All): Set
70 + (Extension 0-9999)
721 (UK/HK) or 721# (TMIT) +
(Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (All): Clear
Γ09
731 (UK/HK) or 731# (TMI) +
(Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (All): Set from
another extension
Γ10
741 (UK/HK0 or 741# (TMI)
Call Forward (All): Clear from
another extension
Γ11
751 (UK/HK) or 751# (TMI)
Call Forward (No Answer): Set
71 + (Extension 0-9999)
723 (UK/HK) or 723# (TMI)
+ (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (No Answer): Clear
Γ12
733 (UK/HK) or 733# (TMI)
+ (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (No Answer): Set
from another extension
Γ13
743 (UK/HK) or 743# (TMI)
Call Forward (No Answer): Clear
from another extension
Γ14
753 (UK/HK) or 753# (TMI)
Call Forward (Busy): Set
72 + (Extension 0-9999)
722 (UK/HK) or 722# (TMI)
+ (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (Busy): Clear
Γ15
732 (UK/HK) or 732# (TMI)
+ (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (Busy): Set from
another extension
Γ16
742 (UK/HK) or 742# (TMI)
Call Forward (Busy): Clear from
another extension
Γ17
752 (UK/HK) or 752# (TMI)
DND Set/Clear
Γ18
720 (UK/HK) or 720# (TMI)
DND Set from Attendant
Γ19
740 (UK/HK) or 740# (TMI)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
REDIAL + Fixed Feature
Code + (additional digits to
program into key)
Default Flexible Feature Code
Feature Description
DND Clear from Attendant
Γ20
750 (UK/HK) or 750# (TMI)
Γ21
7ΓΓ
Alarm Set
Γ22
Γ31
Alarm Clear
Γ23
Γ39
BGM On/Off
Γ24
Γ30
(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature
Code)
Call Forward (All/Busy/No-Answer/
DND): Clear (Prior to Ver 3.0)
Call Forward (All/Busy/No-Answer/
DND and Absence Message: Clear
(Version 3.0 and higher)
Day 1/Night Toggle (Prior to Ver 3.0)
Day 1/Day 2/ Night Toggle (Ver 3.0 Γ25
and higher)
760 (UK/HK) or 760# (TMI)
Day 2
Γ26
761 (UK/HK) or 761# (TMI)
Night 1
Γ27
762 (UK/HK) or 762# (TMI)
Night 2 (for 2-Way VM)
Γ28
763 (UK/HK) or 763# (TMI)
Paging
Γ29 + (Page Group No.)
# + (Zone No.)
Meet-Me Answer
Γ30
##
Call Pickup Group-All Calls
Γ31
701 (UK/HK) or 701# (TMI)
Call Pickup Group-Trunk Calls Only
Γ32
702 (UK/HK) or 702# (TMI)
Call Pickup Group-designated
(pick up a call in another Pickup
Group)
Γ33 + (Call Pickup Grp 1-99)
703 (UK/HK) or 703# (TMI)
Direct Call Pickup
73 + (Extension 0-9999)
704 (UK/HK) or 704# (TMI)
Trunk Call Pickup
Γ34
*0
Headset Mode On/Off
Γ35
Conference Key
Γ36
Transfer Key
Γ37
Program Key
Γ38
Recall - Flash Key
Γ39
PSD Name Assignment
Γ40
Ext. Directory Name Assignment
Γ41
Speed-Dial Directory Name
Assignment
Γ42
MCO-1 Access (initial setting: 9)
Γ43
9 (UK/HK), 0 (TMI)
MCO-2 Access (initial setting: 81)
Γ44
81
MCO-3 Access (initial setting: 82)
Γ45
82
MCO-4 Access (initial setting: 83)
Γ46
83
MCO-5 Access (initial setting: 84)
Γ47
84
Callback at Busy Tone
Γ49
Camp-on at Busy Tone
Γ50
Message-Waiting Set at Busy Tone
Γ51
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
167
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
REDIAL + Fixed Feature
Code + (additional digits to
program into key)
Feature Description
Default Flexible Feature Code
(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature
Code)
Message-Waiting Priority Set at Busy
Γ52
Tone
Busy Override Set
Γ53
Voice Call/Tone Call Toggle
Γ54
Message-Waiting Set at Ringback
Tone
Γ55
Message-Waiting Priority Set at
Ringback Tone
Γ56
Account Code Entry
Γ57
Extension Port Confirm
Γ59
Trunk Port Confirm
Γ60
VM Transfer Key 1
74 + (Ext.No. 0-9999)
VM Transfer Key 2
75 + (Ext.No. 0-9999)
Variable Mode
Γ61
Call Logging Confirmation Mode
Start
Γ62
Station Call Park Hold/Answer
Γ63
Station Call Park Hold
Γ64
771 (UK/HK) or 771# (TMI)
Station Call Park Answer (Own Ext.) Γ65
772 (UK/HK) or 772# (TMI)
Station Call Park Answer (Other Ext.) Γ66
773 (UK/HK) or 773# (TMI)
Station Call Park Transfer
Γ67
774 (UK/HK) or 774# (TMI)
Release Key
Γ68
Answer Key
Γ69
OHVA Key
Γ70
Split Key
Γ71
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Key
Γ72
ANY Key
Γ8 + (Up to 4 digits 0 - 9, #, or *)
8#
Note: The following feature keys were added with Version 3.0
168
Station Lockout Set (Own Ext.)
Γ#01
746 (UK/HK) or 746# (TMI)
Station Lockout Set (Other Ext.)
Γ#02
747 (UK/HK) or 747# (TMI)
Station Lockout Cancel (Other Ext.)
Γ#03
748 (UK/HK) or 748# (TMI)
Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station
Lockout Security Code Change
Γ#04
749 (UK/HK) or 749# (TMI)
Callback Cancellation
Γ58
769 (UK/HK) or 769# (TMI)
Zip Mode On/Off (toggle)
Γ73
(Version 3.5 and higher)
Direct Call to a PDN Ext.
Γ74
766 (UK/HK) or 766# (TMI)
UNA Pickup
Γ77
705 (UK/HK) or 705# (TMI)
Absence Message Code
Γ78
729 (UK/HK) or 729# (TMI)
Network Flash during Talk on FF-Key Γ79
767 (UK/HK) or 767# (TMI)
(Version3.5 and higher)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Feature Description
REDIAL + Fixed Feature
Code + (additional digits to
program into key)
PDN #1 Key
01
PDN #2 Key
02
PDN #3 Key
03
NPDN #1 Key
01 + (Ext No. 0-9999)
NPDN #2 Key
02 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
NPDN #3 Key
03 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
ACD-1 Wrap Key
Γ#83
(Version 3.5 and higher)
ACD-2 Wrap Key
Γ#88
(Version 3.5 and higher)
Text Message Sent
Γ75 + (Message code no. 0-9)
Text Message Reply
Γ76 + (Message code no. 0-9)
Login Key for CTAPI
Γ#90
Default Flexible Feature Code
(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature
Code)
(Version 3.5 and higher)
Note: The following feature keys were added with Version 4.0
Message and Voice Mail Key
76 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
Silent Monitor Key
77 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
Call Record Key
78 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
Room Monitoring Set Key
Γ#05
775
Room Monitoring Initiate Key
Γ#06
776
768
Handsfree Answerback
Description
Handsfree Answerback allows you to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset.
The System must be programmed for Voice Calling for you to use this feature. You must press 1
during a call to switch from Tone Calling to Voice Calling.
Operation
To answer calls using Handsfree Answerback:
Action
Result
1. When the intercom call arrives, confirm that the MIC LED
is off.
(If it is lit, press the MIC key to turn it off.)
2. Speak into the microphone to answer.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
169
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
Handsfree Answerback can be used to respond to only voice calls from other extensions - not
tone calls.
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension Class of Service (COS) that
allows Voice Calling.
Handsfree Operation
Description
Handsfree Operation allows you to use all available System features without lifting the handset. Any
speakerphone can be operated handsfree.
Operation
To initiate Handsfree Operation:
Action
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Phone is offhook with access to full range
of calling features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Headset Operation
Description
Headset Operation allows you to handle calls with a headset instead of with the handset or
speakerphone.
Operation
To answer calls using the Headset Operation:
170
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Note: If Headset mode is already on, the following procedure turns it off. If Headset mode is off,
this procedure turns it on.
Action
1. Pick up the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Enter 90 for Headset mode.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
A headset must be installed.
Considerations
•
Intercom Dial Tone is enabled/disabled regardless of Headset mode (per programming for the
Extension Class of Service [COS])
Hot Dial Pad
Description
The dial pad on digital key phones can be designated as “hot” on an extension-by-extension basis.
The Hot Dial Pad allows the user to initiate a call without going offhook. Extensions with the Hot
Dial Pad enabled can initiate calls by pressing any of the numeric keys (0-9). The “*” and “#” keys
are not hot.
The Dial Pad can be hot under these conditions:
•
When the extension is idle
•
When the extension is holding a call
•
When the extension is receiving a page.
The Dial Pad cannot be hot under these conditions:
•
When a call is ringing at the extension (intercom or trunk)
•
When the extension is on a call.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
Paging: The Hot Dial Pad cannot be used to initiate a page.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
171
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hot Line
Description
Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number
simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.
Operation
To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Automatically connected to pre-assigned
extension or speed dial number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Intercom Calling
Description
The System provides two methods of intercom calling:
•
Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.
•
Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating
extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone
calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone
calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access
code.
Operation
To make a call using Intercom Calling:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
172
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to
make a voice call, enter 1.
Result
• Dallied number displays
• INT LED lights
Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to
make a tone call, enter 1.
4. Speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
INT LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The Handsfree Answerback feature can be used to respond to only voice calls from other
extensions - not tone calls.
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialled by pressing the FL/R
key.
Operation
To automatically redial the last number dialled:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
OR...
Press a vacant trunk key or enter a trunk access code
(default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or
81-84).
Result
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = trunk
number)
2. Press the FL/R key.
Last number dialled displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Line key LED turns red, then goes off.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
173
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both
intercom and trunk calls or trunk calls only.
Line Appearances
Description
The System provides three types of line appearances
•
•
•
Direct Station Select (DSS) / Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Appearances
Direct In Line (DIL) Appearances
Multi-Exchange (CO) Line Appearance
DSS/BLF Appearances
When a DSS/BLF key is programmed, it automatically provides one-touch dialling and DSS and BLF
for the assigned extension numbers. If desired, the DSS/BLF key can also provide ring or delayed ring
monitor. For example, you can set extension A as a DSS/BLF ringing key on extension B. When
extension A rings, the LED of the DSS/BLF key on extension B flashes and the phone rings.
Ringing or delayed ringing can be set on extensions which have a BLF key. The LED of the DSS/BLF
key flashes green during ringing and the display shows the BLF extension number.
When extension A is in use, the LED of the DSS/BLF key on extension B lights red. If one extension
has the Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature activated, the DSS/BLF key lights green.
Four DSS/BLF modes are available as follows:
BLF LED Extension
Indication
Call
Call
Pickup
Ring
Ring
(Immed.) (Delayed)
Voice
Mail
Transfer
DSS/BLF Type
FF Key
Entry
DSS Only (No
Pick Up/No Ring)
(9 + Ext #)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
DSS/BLF
Immediate Ring
(81 + Ext #)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
DSS/BLF Delayed (82 + Ext #)
Ring
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
DSS/BLF No Ring (83 + Ext #)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Operation
To assign a DSS/BLF key:
Action
Result
1. Press the PROG key.
2. Press the FF key to be assigned the DSS/BLF appearance.
174
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
3. Press the REDIAL key.
4. Enter the code for the desired DSS/BLF mode as follows:
9+ Ext # ---- DSS Mode Only
81+ Ext # --- DSS/BLF Immediate Ring
82 + Ext # -- DSS/BLF Delayed Ring
83 + Ext # -- DSS/BLF No Ring
5. Press the HOLD key.
To make an intercom call using the DSS/BLF key:
Action
Result
1. Press the flashing DSS/BLF key.
To pick up a call on a DSS/BLF key:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the flashing DSS/BLF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
If several calls arrive at a DSS/BLF key, the calls are queued and ring on a first-in, first-out basis.
•
If a BLF key has a second call while busy and off- hook signalling is enabled, the BLF key starts
blinking. The call can be answered by pressing the BLF key or going on hook and then off hook.
DIL Appearances
DIL keys are used to originate and receive calls over specific trunk numbers (DIL keys can be
assigned to any trunk number).
The LED for a DIL key will flash red on an incoming call even if the trunk is set to ring. If another
extension answers the call, the LED on the telephone will light solid red.
Operation
Operation
To originate a trunk call...
Action
1. Press an idle DIL key.
2. The key blinks green as the call is made.
To place a call on Exclusive Trunk Hold (page 133)...
ICX-50-700
1. Press the DIL key.
ICX (International) issued October 2000
175
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
Action
To place a call on System Trunk Hold (page 133)...
1. Press the HOLD key.
To transfer a call...
1. Press the HOLD key.
2. Dial the destination extension.
3. Press the PROG key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Appearances
Description
You can make and receive trunk calls using an MCO key. Each extension can have up to 5 MCO keys.
An MCO key can be assigned to any of the pooled trunk groups. Pressing the MCO key is the same as
dialling the MCO Access Code (usually 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84 by
default).
Operation
Operation
Action
To originate a trunk call
Press an idle MCO key.
The key blinks (green) as the call is made.
To receive a call on an MCO key.
If ringing line preference is enabled, go off-hook.
If ringing line preference is not enabled, go offhook and press the MCO key with the green
flashing LED.
The LED lights solid green.
To place a call on Exclusive trunk Hold
Press the MCO key.
The key flashes green while the call is held.
To place a call on System Trunk Hold
Press the HOLD key.
The key flashes green while the call is held.
To transfer a call
Press HOLD, dial the destination extension, then
press PROG (if on-hook transfer is off) or go onhook.
Considerations
•
•
•
176
Press the MCO key that flashes red to answer an outside call.
If you are already on a call appearing on an MCO key and you press another MCO key, a line on
the other MCO key is selected and the first call is dropped.
If a trunk key is assigned, the trunk key LED will light when that specific trunk is used instead of
the MCO key LED.
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
•
There are five groups of outside lines: (usually 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or
81-84 by default) .
•
MCO keys cannot be assigned on the DSS/72 or the EM/24.
•
An MCO key must be assigned in programming mode. The MCO key cannot be assigned by the
end user with FF key assignments.
Message Key
Description
The System supports the MSG FF key on the VB-44225/VB-D411LDSUK large-display phone. This
key provides the following functionality:
•
Message Wait Callback: If a callback message has been left by another extension, you can
press the MSG FF key to place an automatic callback to that extension. If more than one
callback message has been received, pressing the MSG FF key performs auto-callback in the
order received.
•
Priority Message Wait Callback (One-Touch Voice Mail Access): You can press the MSG
FF key to automatically access your voice mailbox. The phone will dial your voice mailbox
and send access codes (if programmed) for retrieving new messages.
Operation
To automatically call back an extension that left a message or to access Voice Mail:
Action
1. Press the MSG FF key.
Result
Automatically call back to extension
OR...
Automatic access to Voice Mail
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The MSG FF key must be assigned first (default =*08).
•
The Message lamp lights when a message has been received.
•
If more than one callback message has been received, pressing the MSG FF key performs autocallback in the order received.
•
The MSG FF key works only when the phone is idle or receiving internal dial tone.
•
Auto-callback is always enabled for large display phones.
•
Messages are accessed in a first-in, first-out order for Message Wait, except Priority Message
Wait, which is typically sent by Voice Mail.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
177
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Message Waiting/Callback
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication
at that extension, requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a message waiting indication:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. While the phone is still ringing, or when you hear the busy
tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4 [UK/
HK] or 4# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
MSG Accepted displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• Message lamp flashes at called extension
• MSG EXT XXX displays (where XXX
= calling extension number) or name
of calling extension displays at called
extension
To answer a message waiting indication (callback):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6) or
press the MSG FF key if using a large-display phone.
OR...
Press the Flexible Function (FF) Key assigned as a Message
Callback Key (Version 4.0 and higher).
• Telephone automatically dials extension that sent the message waiting indication
• Message lamp goes off when your call
is answered
To cancel a callback message:
Action
178
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5) or
press the MSG FF key if using a large-display phone.
MSG Cleared displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Message lamp goes off
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Note: Message waiting/callback messages may also be cancelled by either the originator or the
receiver by calling the other party.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party Voice Mail. See “Voice Mail Integration
(Third Party)” on page 72.
Mute Function
Description
Mute Function allows you to block outgoing audio to the other party while on a call.
With 44-Series phones, audio can be blocked through both the microphone and the handset. (For
handset mute, an FF key must first be assigned as a MIC key.)
Operation
To block outgoing audio using the Handset Mute (VB-D4,VB-D6/VB-442XX-Series
phones only):
Action
1. During a handset call, press the MIC key.
Result
MIC LED blinks.
Outgoing audio is blocked through
phone’s handset
2. To turn Mute off, press the MIC key again.
To block outgoing audio using the Microphone Mute:
Action
1. During a handset call, press the MIC FF key
Result
MIC LED off.
Outgoing audio is blocked through
phone’s microphone
2. To turn Mute off, press the MIC FF key again.
MIC LED on.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
179
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
The fixed MIC key works both for handset mute and microphone mute. But only VB-D4,VB-D6/VB442XX-Series phones have the fixed MIC key, so others must assign an FF key as a MIC key.
Offhook Monitor
Description
Offhook Monitor lets you put a call on speaker while the handset is offhook. You can still
communicate with the other party via the handset, but you will also be able to hear the other party on
the phone’s speaker. The other party can only hear what is transmitted through your handset however,
because audio is not transmitted through your microphone.
Operation
To put a call on speaker using the Offhook Monitor:
Action
1. During a handset call, press the ON/OFF key.
Result
• Other party is audible through speaker
and handset
• Phone’s microphone is mute
2. To take a caller off speaker (disable Offhook Monitor) but
continue the call via the handset, press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Offhook Monitor is available on 44-Series phones only.
•
Offhook Monitor can be disabled system-wide.
Offhook Signalling
Description
Offhook Signalling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another trunk call has arrived or a
call is camped-on.
180
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
After receiving an offhook signal during a call:
Action
1. Press the HOLD key.
Result
First call on hold
2. Press the flashing FF key for the trunk of the incoming call.
Note: For details about handling multiple calls, see “Call Hold” on page 133.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The trunk call type may be multiple ring, direct, BLF Ring, or camp-on.
•
The System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:
• During a conference call
• During an OHVA or Busy override
• Data Privacy is enabled
• The receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.
Offhook Voice Announce
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice
Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear. You can also
transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature. The called
party may optionally reply to (answer) an OHVA call.
Beginning with CPC Version 3.0, the busy party can reply to an offhook announcement with a text
message that displays on the announcing phone. Any one of the following messages can be selected.
Messages 6 to 9 and 0 have no default message text. All the messages can be changed through system
programming. (See “Set Text Message Replies” on page 112 for more information on setting Text
Message Replies).
Prior to the release of Version 4.5, it was not possible for a caller to activate the OHVA feature when a
call was placed to an available second or third Directory Number (DN) key. Beginning with Version
4.5, the calling party can activate the OHVA feature even when the second and/or third DN key is
available. Depending on how this feature has been programmed, the calling party hears one of three
different tones. Ring-Back Tone or Special Tone is heard when a call is placed to a “non-Voice Mail
assigned” extension. When a call is placed to a “Voice Mail assigned” number, Ring-Back Tone or
Busy Tone may be heard.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
181
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Table 19. Text Message Replies
Message No.
Message Text
Message No.
Message Text
1
Take A Message
6
User Defined
2
Please Hold
7
User Defined
3
Will Call Back
8
User Defined
4
Transfer
9
User Defined
5
Unavailable
0
User Defined
Operation
To make an OHVA :
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy signal
3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK]
or 8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• OHVA EXT XXX displays if busy
extension called (where XXX = calling
extension.
• INT LED flashes
4. Make your announcement
To answer an OHVA:
Action
1. Press the OHVA Split key.
Result
Split key flashes red
Note: You must program an FF key as a split key (default =
*71) to use this feature.
2. To return to the previous call, press the Split key again.
The OHVA originating party receives
Busy signal.
To transfer a call using OHVA:
Action
182
Result
1. Press the HOLD key to put the current call on hold.
Current call on hold
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is being transferred.
Busy signal
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
3. Enter OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK] or
8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) and announce the call to
be transferred.
4. If transfer is:
• Not accepted, retrieve the call by pressing the associated flashing MCO key (if an appearing call) or by
pressing the HOLD key (if a non appearing call).
• Accepted, and On-hook Transfer is enabled for your
extension, replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
key.
If On-hook Transfer is not enabled for your extension,
press the PROG key (or RELEASE key if using DSS/
72).
To reply to off-hook voice announcement with a text message:
Action
Result
1. Press the MSG FF key.
2. Enter the Reply Text Message number (1-9, 0). See Table 19
on page 182 for the text message replies.)
The text message reply appears on the
camped on telephone display.
To answer a call after it has been announced using the OHVA:
Action
1. Replace the handset.
Result
Your extension rings
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
The held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the OHVA hangs up.
If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set time limit, then return to
the extension sending the OHVA by transfer recall timer.
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
If a Split key is assigned to the extension that receives an OHVA call, when an OHVA is being
received, the Split key blinks green. If the split key is pressed during an OHVA call to answer,
the Split key lights red. If the split key is pressed again to terminate the OHVA conversation, the
Split key extinguishes.
If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.
Text message reply requires Display Key Telephones. Also, a Text Message Reply key must be
programmed on the replying telephone.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
183
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
One-Touch Keys
Description
You can use one-touch keys to store telephone numbers, speed dial numbers, or feature access codes.
To dial the stored number, you go offhook and press the desired key.
Operation
To program a one-touch key for outside telephone numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. Dial the phone number to be stored.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To assign an System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers to a one-touch key:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. Press the MEMORY key.
5. Enter the SSD bin number to be programmed.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To chain 2 to 6 SSD numbers to a single one-touch key:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. Press the MEMORY key.
5. Enter the SSD bin number that contains the first part of the
number to be dialled.
184
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
6. If a pause is required, press the FL/R key
Result
• Pause occurs between access code and
telephone number
• R displays
7. Repeat steps 4-5 (up to 5 more times) for each additional
speed dial number to be chained.
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To assign a feature code or extension number to a one-touch key:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. If the System is set for MCO Code level, press the following
keys MEMORY * #. Otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5. Enter the desired feature code or extension number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To check a programmed one-touch key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the one-touch key to be checked.
Programmed data displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
One-touch keys 1-10 are the same as Personal Speed Dial (PSDs) numbers 80-89.
Onhook Dialling
Description
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
185
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Onhook Dialling is a standard feature for key telephones where you can dial onhook using the
dialpad, one-touch keys, or FF keys.
Operation
To dial onhook:
Action
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Paging
Description
The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages
are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of
an external paging system connected to the System.
Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
To make a page:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).
3. Enter the number of the desired paging group (0-9).
4. Make your announcement.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
186
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Meet-Me Answer
To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).
Connected to specified party
Hardware Requirements
•
External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
You can assign the paging access code to a one-touch or FF key. Beginning with Version 4.5 and
higher, the assigned FF key LED indicates whether the paging system is in use. If the paging
system is not in use when a page is originated, the FF key LED lights solid green on the
originator’s telephone. If someone in the paging group initiates a page, assigned FF key LEDs on
all other telephones will light solid red until the page has been terminated.
If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to paging groups 0-9
through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another
extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override.
Beginning with Version 4.5 and higher, the paging system can be set to “timeout” if a page is
longer than a specified length of time (0 to 255 seconds). If this feature is set and the timeout
period has elapsed, the page originator’s handset will emit a Fast Busy Tone and the words
“Paging Time Out” will be displayed on the originating telephone’s display.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
187
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Ringing Line Preference
Description
Ringing Line Preference enables an extension to answer a ringing call by simply picking up the
handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.
Operation
To answer a call using Ringing Line Preference:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
If disabled in Extension Programming, you must press the line key or enter the feature code for
incoming pick-up in order to answer a call.
Room Monitoring
Version 4.0 and higher
Description
This feature allows the user to monitor the sounds in a room from another extension or room. The
transmitter in the telephone handset is used as a remote “microphone” for monitoring these sounds.
To activate this feature, the monitored extension must enable the Room Monitor feature before the
monitoring extension can listen to the sounds in the room. The monitored extension can be enabled
using a SLT, DSLT, or Key Telephone. No special programming is required to allow an extension to
enable the monitored mode.
Operation
To set up the monitored extension:
Action
1. Dial the monitored extension access code (default 775),
OR...
Note: The handset must be off-hook to activate the
Room Monitor feature.
Result
You will hear a confirmation tone after
the monitored extension has enabled the
Room Monitor feature. (If the monitored
extension has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)
Press an FF key assigned with the monitored access code
188
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Additional operations may be performed from the monitored extension when it is in monitored mode:
Action
Result
1. Placing the handset back on-hook or pressing ON/OFF
Monitored mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, PROG, CONF, MIC, MENU,
PREV, NEXT, REDIAL, MEMORY, FF Key
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitored mode.
3. FL/R
Monitored mode is cancelled. Dial tone is
returned to handset.
Note:
When a monitored extension receives a call, the caller hears a busy tone.
To set up the monitoring extension:
Action
Result
1. Dial the monitoring extension access code (default 776)
and the extension number of the monitored extension, OR...
The monitoring extension enters the monitoring mode. (If the monitored extension
has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)
Press an FF key assigned the monitored access code and the
extension number of the monitored extension, OR...
While the handset is on-hook, press an FF key assigned to
the Room Monitor followed by the monitored extension
number.
The monitoring extension will automatically enter the monitoring mode.
The monitoring operation can be allowed or denied by extension COS and is controlled by the Busy
Override feature. If Busy Override is denied and the user attempts to monitor an extension, the user
will hear a fast busy tone.
Additional operations may be performed from the monitoring extension when it is in monitoring
mode:
Action
Result
1. Placing the handset back On Hook or pressing ON/OFF
Monitoring mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, PROG, CONF, MIC, MENU,
PREV, NEXT, FL/R, REDIAL, MEMORY, FF Key
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitoring mode.
3. LINE
Monitoring mode is cancelled. Dial tone
is returned to handset.
Services available on the monitoring extension while the Room Monitoring feature is active:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Camp On
Call Back
Message displayed on LCD when extension is busy
Message Waiting On/Off
Cancellation of DND and Call Forwarding by another extension
Busy Transfer
DIL Incoming Call (Queuing)
Services NOT available to either the monitored or monitoring extension when this feature is active:
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
189
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
• Busy Override
• On-Hook VA
• The ability to receive a text message
• Silent Monitor
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Allow/deny Busy Override Send—Monitoring extension)
•
FF1-2-02: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 1
•
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 2
Considerations
•
If the monitored extension is placed on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the
monitoring extension will hear a fast busy tone.
•
If the monitoring extension goes on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitored
extension will remain in the monitored mode, and can be accessed by any other extension
allowed to access the room monitoring mode.
•
A room cannot be monitored from more than one extension at a time. If an attempt is made to
monitor an extension while the extension is being monitored, the user will hear a fast busy tone.
•
ISDN (s-point) extensions cannot access the Room Monitor feature in either the monitor or
monitored modes.
•
A monitoring extension cannot forward a call on hold to a monitored extension.
•
A monitored extension cannot receive a transferred call.
•
If DND is enabled on either the monitoring or monitored extension, DND status is displayed on
the calling extension’s telephone.
•
If the monitoring or monitored extension has an absence message set, the absence message will
be displayed on the calling extension’s telephone.
Silent Monitor
Version 4.0 and higher
Description
The Silent Monitor feature allows an ACD supervisor to monitor a call between an ACD agent and a
caller without the knowledge of either party. (See CAUTION, above.) If necessary, the ACD
supervisor can initiate a three-way call by barging into the call.
190
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To initiate Silent Monitor:
Action
Result
1. Press ON/OFF + 768 + Extension number you want
to monitor
OR...
Press the FF key assigned as a Silent Monitor Key + Extension number you want to monitor*
OR...
The Silent Monitor feature is active, and
the extension is being monitored. (The
Silent Monitor key flashes green when
Silent Monitor is active.)
Press only the Silent Monitor Key if the FF key has been
preprogrammed to monitor a specific extension number.
You do not need to enter the extension number.
Note: The Silent Monitor key is disabled when the extension assigned to that key is idle, dialing, or
ringing.
Silent Monitor Key Color Definitions
FF Key Color
Definition
Possible Operation
Clear
Cannot monitor
None
Solid Red
Able to monitor
Press Silent Monitor key
Flashing Green
Not monitoring
On-Hook or CONF
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Silent Monitor Initiate (0 = allow, 1 = deny, default = 1)
•
FF1-0-03: Silent Monitor Receive (0 = allow, 1 = deny, default = 1)
Considerations
•
Be sure all phones that should NOT be allowed to monitor have a COS that restricts monitoring.
•
Silent Monitor is allowed or denied by setting the appropriate extension COS.
•
Only one supervisor can initiate Silent Monitor on an individual extension at any
given time.
•
Display telephones can initiate Silent Monitoring. SLTs cannot initiate Silent Monitoring.
•
Display telephones and SLTs can be monitored.
•
A supervisor cannot initiate Silent Monitoring on an extension when that extension is on a
conference call.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
191
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Speed Dialling
Description
The System supports the following speed dial features:
•
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
•
System Speed Dial (SSD)
•
Speed Dial Linking
•
Speed Dial Name Assignment
Personal Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored
in PSD bins numbered 80-99.
You can assign up to 10 PSD numbers to the one-touch keys on a non-display or small-display phone,
and up to 20 PSD numbers to the soft keys on a large-display phone. Once the PSD numbers have
been assigned, you dial them by pressing the appropriate key. (For additional information, see “OneTouch Keys” on page 184.)
You can also enter a name up to 7 characters for each of the PSD numbers. This allows PSD numbers
to be confirmed by name rather than by number.
Operation
To assign PSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
Enter Spd Dial displays
4. Dial the phone number.
Stored Spd Dial displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
192
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
3. Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To check a PSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the MEMORY key.
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
Programmed data displays
5. If you want to check the next PSD number, press the HOLD
key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To delete a PSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
Cleared Spd Dial displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
PSD number can be dialled from One-Touch keys. (For additional information, see “One-Touch
Keys” on page 184.)
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
If the called party’s number and name are stored in the PSD code, that information appears on the
display when you use the speed dial code.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
193
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
Speed dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters. The following table reflects which keys to
use.
To indicate. . .
*
Enter/Press
Shown on Display?
Digit or character
0, 1 - 9, *, #
yes (unless preceded by MEMORY * 2 - see
below)
Intercom Level *
MEMORY * #
no
MCO Code 9 (UK/HK), 0
(Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)
**
MEMORY * 0
no
MCO Code 81**
MEMORY * 71
no
MCO Code 82**
MEMORY * 72
no
MCO Code 83**
MEMORY * 73
no
MCO Code 84**
MEMORY * 74
no
Pause
FL/R
no
DP - DTMF Code
MEMORY * *
no
SSD Code
MEMORY
NN(N)
no
Hyphen (-)
PROG
-
Display Number (Start / Stop)
***
MEMORY * 2
DTMF Conversion After the
Other Party Answers
MEMORY * 3
(Version 3.5 and
higher)
Indicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an extension
number. (Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level.) See Note below.
** Indicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should
seize the next available trunk when dialling. (Not needed if your System is set for trunk
level.) See Note below.
*** Indicates that the enclosed digits should not be displayed during dialling. Must precede
and follow the digits that you do not want displayed. Example: MEMORY *2 5554143 MEMORY *2.
Note: The System has two levels - Trunk Level and Intercom Level. If set at Trunk Level
(default), you must enter the code for Intercom Level when programming a feature access code
or extension number for speed dialling. If the System is set at Intercom Level, you must enter the
MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed dialling.
System Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be
programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD
numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins
000-799.
194
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To assign SSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
Enter Spd Dial displays
4. Dial the phone number.
Stored Spd Dial displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the MEMORY key.
A displays
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To check an SSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the MEMORY key.
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
Programmed data displays
5. If you want to check the next SSD number, press the HOLD
key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
195
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To delete an SSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
Cleared Spd Dial displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
If numbers do not appear on the display when you use SSD codes (00-79 or 000-799), your
extension is not programmed to display that data.
The System can be programmed to allow SSD numbers to override toll restrictions.
Speed Dial Linking
You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers
longer than 24 characters. You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key
or by entering the speed dial bin number.
Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the
keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier
access codes, etc.
Note: Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin, the SSD bins must already have been
programmed with the appropriate speed dial information.
Operation
To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin:
Action
Result
1. Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
3. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710
[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
196
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-90).
Result
Enter Spd Dial displays
5. Press the MEMORY key.
6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799) that contains
the first part of the number to be dialled.
7. Repeat steps 5-6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs
to be dialled.
8. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Stored PSDXXX displays
To use a PSD Key that links multiple SSDs:
Action
Result
1. If necessary, select the trunk group (9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (Normally the trunk is
selected by the speed dial numbers.)
2. Press the PSD key.
To manually link speed dial keys together:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
3. If you are using a PSD number, press the one-touch key for
the first part of the number.
If you are using an SSD number, press the MEMORY key,
then enter the SSD bin number.
4. Use the one-touch keys or press the MEMORY key and
enter the SSD codes to dial the parts of the phone number
until it is completed.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Speed Dial Name Assignments
You can assign names to PSD numbers from a key telephone without entering the programming
mode. If allowed in the Extension Class of Service (COS), you can also assign names to SSD
numbers.
(PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters. SSD names can contain a maximum of 16
characters.)
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
197
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
PSD Names:
To set PSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode.
A B C D E F P80 displays (where P80 =
PSD bin 80)
5. Press the up or down arrow key to display the desired PSD
bin number.
A B C D E F PXX displays (where PXX
= desired PSD bin number)
6. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
199.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 200.)
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data
7. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 199.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 200.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
8. Repeat steps 6-7 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired PSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
9. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next PSD bin number displays
10. To enter another speed dial name repeat steps 5-9.
SSD Names:
To set SSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode.
198
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
5. Enter the speed dial bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
-SSDXXX
6. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
7. Press the FL/R key to clear the current data.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
8. Enter the speed dial name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
199.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 200.)
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 199.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 200.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next SSD bin number displays
12. To enter another speed dial name, press the CONF key
and repeat steps 5-11.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
Example 1. Large-Display Phone
To enter D:
a. Press the first soft key on the top left.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
199
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third soft key from the top right.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Example 2. Small-Display Phone
200
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press. (See step 7-8 above.)
abcdef
ghijkl
mnopqr
stuvwx
y z : & / sp
ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX
YZ.,’-
To enter D:
a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
-
To enter o:
a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
201
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The ability to assign SSD names is allowed/restricted to anyone with a COS that allows access to
User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User Maintenance” of this document.)
Station Lockout
Version 3.0 and higher
Description
Use the Station Lockout feature to limit use of your phone by others when you are away from your
telephone. When the Station Lockout feature is in use, the TRS (Call Barring) Class of your telephone
is changed. Anyone using your telephone is limited to the calling abilities defined by this Lockout
TRS (Call Barring) Class.
In addition, with the appropriate COS, you can set or cancel Station Lockout for other telephones.
202
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To activate Station Lockout feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Station Lockout feature code (default = 746 [UK/
HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
St. Lock Set displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Lock displays
To cancel Station Lockout feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel feature code (default =
746 [UK/HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) .
Enter ID Code displays
3. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
security code.
Cleared St. Lock displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
The telephone display returns to the normal display.
To activate Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Set for another extension feature
code (default = 747 [UK/HK] or 747# [Taiwan, Malaysia,
Indonesia].
Enter Lock EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
St. Lock Set displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel for another extension feature code (default = 748 [UK/HK] or 748# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])
Enter Lock EXT #displays
3. Enter the extension number to activate station lockout.
Enter ID Code displays
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
203
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
security code.
Cleared St. Lock displays
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
The telephone display returns to the normal display.
To change the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
Security Code Change code (default = 749 [UK/HK] or
749# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Enter Old ID displays
3. Enter the current Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.
Enter New ID displays
4. Enter the new Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
security code.
Stored ID Code displays
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
The telephone display returns to the normal display.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Walking TRS (Call Barring) and Station Lockout use the same security code.
•
You cannot override station lockout using Walking TRS (Call Barring) feature.
•
If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, the phone will issue a busy tone.
•
If station lockout is set, the phone is limited to the Station Lockout TRS (Call Barring) Class
outside calling abilities. This TRS (Call Barring) Class should be carefully selected to only allow
the desired call types.
•
Without Walking TRS (Call Barring) /Station Lockout Security Code, you cannot set the Station
Lockout feature.
Step Call (Reset Call)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the system allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
204
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To use Step Call (Reset Call) to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial an extension.
3. When you hear a busy tone, dial the last digit of another
extension.
Example: You dial Extension 213, but it is busy. To dial Extension 214, press 4.
Considerations
•
The second extension called using the Step Call (Reset Call) feature must have the same number
of digits as the first extension.
•
If you program to set step call, following feature are not available.
• Camp-on (EXT. No +2 [UK/HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indondesia])
• Call Back Request (EXT. No +3 [UK/HK] or 3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])
• Message Wait (EXT. No +4 [UK/HK] or 4# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], EXT. No
+5 [UK/HK] or 5# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])
• Intercom Busy Override (EXT. No +9 [UK/HK] or 9# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])
Timed Reminder Call
Description
Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.
Operation
To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).
Enter Alarm hhmm displays
3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.
(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1
AM, 1300 for 1 PM).
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
ICX-50-700
Alarm HH:MM displays (where HH =
hour and MM = minutes)
ICX (International) issued October 2000
205
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Time display disappears
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
An alarm tone (default = 16 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.
•
An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.
•
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
•
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3
minutes later.
Trunk Access
Description
The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside code:
•
Trunk Access
•
Direct Trunk Access
•
MCO Line Preference
•
MCO Trunk Access
Trunk Key Access
You can access an outside line by pressing a trunk key.
Operation
To access an outside line:
Action
1. Press a vacant trunk key.
Result
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
2. Dial the phone number
206
Dialled phone number displays
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Direct Trunk Access
Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access
to test trunks or to access data trunks.
Operation
To use Direct Trunk Access:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Enter the Direct Trunk Access code (default = 88).
Dialled number displays
3. Enter the desired trunk number.
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
4. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Line Preference
MCO Line Preference allows you to place an outside call by simply picking up the handset. When you
go offhook, the MCO 1 trunk group is automatically accessed.
Operation
To place a call using MCO Line Preference:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = trunk
number)
2. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
207
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
You can press the ON/OFF key to get intercom dial tone.
MCO Trunk Access
The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle trunk
from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code.
Operation
To seize an idle trunk:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Access Number (default = 9 [UK/HK, 0
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (See Table 20.)
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number.
Dialled phone number displays
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = trunk
number)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-CCU configuration. These lines can be
divided into 99 different trunk groups.
•
Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines.
•
Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes. System defaults for MCO
trunk access codes are displayed in the following table.
•
MCO1 can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature.
•
MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.
Table 20. MCO Trunk Access Codes
MCO Group
Trunk Access Code
MCO1
9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia)
81
82
83
84
MCO2
MCO3
MCO4
MCO5
208
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Trunk Queuing
Description
When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) and
all outside lines in a trunk group are busy, the System can call you when a line becomes free. Simply
pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings.
Operation
To set Trunk Queuing:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or
3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Wait CBK-TRK displays
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.
To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be cancelled.
The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call
using the MCO Trunk Access feature.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
209
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Universal Night Answer to Page
Description
During night mode, Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls for selected trunks to ring
external paging speakers. Universal Night Answer calls can be picked up from any extension,
provided the extension’s Class of Service (COS) allows UNA answer. Beginning with Version 4.5 and
higher, this feature can be programmed so that incoming calls ring on both external paging speakers
and at extensions with CO/MCO appearances on FF keys (Key Telephones only).
Operation
To answer a UNA call:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the UNA to Page Pickup code (default = 705 [UK/
HK] or 705# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Call is received.
To answer a UNA call using the assigned FF key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the assigned FF (UNA) key
Call is received.
Hardware Requirements
•
External paging speakers and associated equipment are not provided with the ICX; they must be
purchased separately.
Considerations
•
The UNA ringing port can be specified by the caller’s tenant group or by the trunk ring
assignment.
Variable Mode
Description
Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys on a display phone to access selected features when
your phone is in the following state:
•
•
•
210
While receiving intercom Dial Tone or during dialling - up to 10 functions
While receiving intercom ringback tone - up to 5 functions
While receiving intercom busy tone - up to 10 functions
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
While talking in intercom mode, during trunk seizure, or during trunk talk - up to 5 functions
Each extension may have customized soft key features available. The customization must be
programmed by the dealer.
To access the feature beside the soft key, simply press the associated soft key.
Operation
To enable Variable Mode:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the Variable Mode FF key
AUTO FNC Mode displays
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
Programmed features display
To Execute a Variable Mode Function:
Action
Result
1. Press the NEXT or PREV keys on the large display telephone or the up or down arrow keys on the small display
telephones until the desired function appears
2. Press the soft key next to the desired function
The variable mode function executes
To cancel Variable Mode:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the Variable Mode FF key.
AUTO FNC Mode displays
3. Press the ON/OFF key again.
To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Small Display Telephone
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + Fixed Feature Code (see
Table 18 on page 165).
The variable mode function executes
OR...
Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + FL/R + Flexible Feature
Code (see Table 18 on page 165).
(where XX is the Flexible Screen position as listed below).
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
211
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Large Display Telephone
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Using the FUNCTION EXT menu, display the desired
extension function location (see Flexible Screen Positions
below)
3. Press PROG + soft key + Fixed Feature Code (see Table
18 on page 165).
OR...
Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + FL/R + Flexible Feature
Code (see Table 18 on page 165).
4. Press the ON/OFF key
Flexible Screen Positions
Variable Mode Display
Position
Displays at
Position 1 to 10
Intercom Dial Tone/Intercom Dial
Position 11 to 15
Intercom Ringback Tone
Position 16 to 25
Intercom Busy Tone
Position 26 to 30
Talk
Hardware Requirements
•
A 44-Series Display Telephone or the VB-3411LDS Large Display Telephone
Considerations
•
The small display telephone will exit Variable Mode after a Variable Mode function is executed.
•
The large display telephone will stay in Variable Mode after a function is executed.
Voice Recognition
Description
Voice Recognition allows you to dial another extension or a speed dial number using verbal
commands. You can also quickly access various telephone features by voice.
Hardware Requirements
212
•
VB-D411DSVUK/VB-44224 12 Key Telephone required
•
VB-44101 Voice Recognition Adaptor required.
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Considerations
•
You must pre-program the desired calling information into the telephone’s Voice Recognition
Unit in order for the System to recognize the verbal commands.
Volume Control
Description
The System allows you to set different receiving volumes for the handset, speaker, intercom ring tone,
and incoming ring tone.
Operation
To adjust the volume while your phone is in use:
Action
1. Press the VOLUME up or down key:
Result
Intercom dial tone
• During ringing to adjust intercom or incoming ring tone
• During a call to adjust handset or speaker volume
To adjust ringer volume while your phone is idle:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Enter 9, then 1 to adjust the incoming ring tone.
Pseudo ring tone
OR...
Enter 9, then 2 to adjust the intercom ring tone.
4. Press the VOLUME up or down key to adjust the loudness
of the tone.
5. Press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Extension programming determines whether or not you can set separate volume levels for trunk
incoming ring tone and intercom ring tone.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
213
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class of Service (COS) allows an extension
user to “carry” his or her toll restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS feature can be used, a Walking COS code must be
entered at your extension before using dialling privileges at another extension.
Operation
To use a Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension
other than your own.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring) access feature code
(default = 87).
3. Dial your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking COS code (0001-9999)
5. Enter an trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84)
6. Dial the phone number.
Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS
remains in effect until you replace the
handset.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
214
The same Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code can be used on more than one extension.
Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.
ARS and TRS (Call Barring) dialling privileges follow the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS.
Before entering a new Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code, you must first clear the existing
code.
When Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension
number) appears in Call Logging.
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Zip Mode
3.5 and higher
Zip mode automatically answers calls when operating a Key Telephone in headset mode.
Operation
To enter or cancel Zip Mode:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key and dial 80.
OR...
When entering Zip mode, ZIP Mode On
displays
When cancelling Zip mode, ZIP Mode
Off displays
Press the ZIP key.
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Call forward takes precedence over zip mode.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
215
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
216
Section 700 - Operation
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
This chapter describes features that are available with the Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT).
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Digital Single Line Telephone
219
Absence Message
219
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
221
222
Verified Account Codes
222
Attendant Group Calls
223
Auto Repeat Dial
224
Background Music
225
Busy Override
225
Callback Request
226
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding-All Calls
227
Call Forwarding - Busy
228
Call Forwarding - No Answer
229
To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:
231
227
Call Hold
System Hold
231
231
Floating Hold
232
Exclusive Hold
233
Broker’s Hold
234
Call Park
236
Call Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
236
Extension Direct Pickup
237
Trunk Group Pickup
237
Trunk Direct Pickup
238
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
239
236
239
Unsupervised Transfer
239
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
240
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
241
Conference Calls
242
Do-Not-Disturb
244
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
217
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
218
Page
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
245
Flash
246
Hot Line
246
Intercom Calling
247
Last Number Redial
247
Message Waiting/Callback
248
Offhook Signalling
249
Offhook Voice Announce
250
Onhook Dialling
251
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
251
252
Room Monitoring
252
Speed Dialling
Personal Speed Dial
255
255
System Speed Dial
257
Speed Dial Linking
258
Step Call (Reset Call)
255
Station Lockout
260
Timed Reminder Call
262
Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
263
263
MCO Trunk Access
264
Trunk Queuing
265
Universal Night Answer to Page
265
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
266
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Digital Single Line Telephone
Figure 7 illustrates the Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT). For more information on DSLT
operation, see Section 751: Key Telephone/DSLT Quick Reference.
Figure 7.
DSLT
DIGITAL BUSINESS SYSTEM
No.
NAME
No.
NAME
1
1
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7 PRS
8 TUV
9WXY
*
0OPER
#
Absence Message
Description
Extension users can leave text messages related to their phones when they are away. When the
unattended extension is dialed, the text message displays on the caller’s phone. Any one of the
following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 have no default message text. All the messages
can be changed through system programming.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
219
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Table 21. Absence Messages
Message No.
Message Text Displayed on
Called Party’s Key
Telephone
Message No.
Message Text Displayed on
Called Party’s Key
Telephone
0
In Meeting
5
Absence_No_5
1
At Lunch
6
Absence_No_6
2
Out of Office
7
Absence_No_7
3
Vacation
8
Absence_No_8
4
Another Office
9
Absence_No_9
Optionally, a return time can be input. Example Return Times for Absence Messages include:
Input
Display
No input
Return
9
Return 9:00
11
Return 11:00
615
Return 6:15
1035
Return 10:35
Operation
To set an Absence Message
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729 [UK/HK]
or 729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the Absence Message number. (See Table 21 above.)
4. If desired, enter the 4-digit returning time.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset.
To cancel an Absence Message
Action
1. Lift the handset .
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default =729 [UK/HK] or
729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Press the HOLD key.
4. Replace the handset.
220
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Calling parties without a display get a busy signal, rather than the Absence Message.
•
Regardless of setting an Absence Message on a DDI/DIL extension, DDI/DILcalls are routed
according to the trunk ringing setting.
An absence message may also be cancelled by dialing 7**. This cancels Do Not Disturb (DND)
and Call Forwarding-All Calls as well.
•
Account Codes
Description
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers
called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the System
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) record.
In addition verified account codes may be used to change the Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call
Barring) level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted.
Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.
This feature works with SMDR (Call Logging). During a phone call, a station user can silently enter
an accounting or client billing code. The entered Code will display on the phone’s LCD as it’s dialled,
so the user can tell it’s being registered. Then later, the Call Logging reports will show the Code
dialled for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.
There are two different types of account codes: Non-Verified and Verified Account Codes. Prior to
Version 5.0, the maximum amount of account code numbers for both types could range from 1-10
digits. Beginning with Version 5.0, a second mode has been added that allows the user to set the
maximum amount of account code numbers from 1-4 digits. An account code error will occur when
more than the maximum number of digits are entered.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Codes aren’t checked by the system for validity. Depending on the setting, the user can
enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced
Account Codes (the user must enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can
enter a code, but doesn’t have to, for each call).
Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and/or outgoing calls. For incoming calls,
the user can enter the Code anytime during the call. For outgoing calls, the user either enters the Code
before accessing an outside line (for forced Codes), or anytime during the call (for voluntary Codes).
Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4-digit or 10-digit code that has been
preprogrammed into an Account Code Table. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything
from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program
these codes with their own Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call Barring Class assignment so that,
when entered, they will override the extension’s TRS (Call Barring) Class. Thus, Verified Account
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
221
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Code users can “float” from phone to phone, placing calls that would normally be restricted on that
phone.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code
before making a call.)
You can assign Non-Verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls. To assign an
account code to an outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call or during the call.
To assign an account code to an incoming call, you enter the account code during the call.
Operation
To enter an account code before making a call:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
5. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a trunk access code
(default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or
81-84).
6. Dial the phone number.
To enter an account code during an outside call:
Action
Result
1. During a call, press the MEMORY key.
2. Press the # key.
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
Verified Account Codes
Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call Barring can
be allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS (Call
Barring). After a call is made, the Call Logging record for the call will show the verified account
code.
222
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To make an outside call that requires an account code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (10 digits).
4. Press a vacant CO Trunk key or enter a trunk access code
(default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or
81-84).
5. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
An Call Logging printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code
records.
Considerations
•
Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.
•
Even though up to 10 digits may be entered, the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits
only.
•
Account codes will be cancelled after using trunk queuing.
•
Account Codes interact with TRS (Call Barring) as shown in the following table:
Forced or Not Forced
Verified or
Non-Verified
Not Forced
Non-Verified
TRS (Call Barring) Class
No Account Entry
Account Entry
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
Forced
Account Code Based TRS
Class
Non-Verified
TRS Class for Forced
Account Code
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
(FF1 0 19 0001)
Account Code Based TRS
Class
Attendant Group Calls
Description
You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialling the designated attendant number.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
223
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To call an attendant group:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0 [UK/HK] or 9
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.
The attendant pilot number is flexible.
If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant
group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialled.
Attendant calls are always tone calls (i.e., not voice calls).
Auto Repeat Dial
Description
If you press the REDIAL key while receiving busy tone on an outside call, the System automatically
redials the number. The System continues to redial the number at set intervals until the called number
answers, the caller hangs up, or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made.
Operation
To use Auto Repeat Dial:
Action
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
3. Dial the phone number.
Busy tone
4. Press the REDIAL key.
System automatically redials number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
224
N/A
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Background Music
Description
If your System is set up to provide Background Music, music can be played from the speakers of idle
telephones. If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music, the music stops and the
phone rings. Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook.
The System can also provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) using a separate music source (except with
CPC-HS). If MOH is provided, callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold. (For
more information on “MOH”, see page 49.)
Operation
To turn Background Music on:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To turn Background Music off:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.
Important: A license may be required from the Society of Composers, Authors,
and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded
music through the MOH and/or Background Music feature. Panasonic, its distributors, and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment
fail to obtain such a license.
Considerations
•
N/A
Busy Override
Description
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
225
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Busy Override allows you to break into one another’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent
information or to create three-party conference calls.
Operation
To use Extension Busy Override:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9 [UK/HK] or 9#
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• Alert tone sounds to both extensions
(system programming required)
• Connected to both parties
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
•
The default for the Override Alert Tone is off. If the Override Alert Tone is enabled, the tone will
be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
Callback Request
Description
If you dial a busy extension, Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that
extension becomes free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.
Operation
To set a Callback Request:
Action
226
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or
3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Ringback tone
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
System calls back when called extension
becomes free
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To respond to the callback request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
System automatically redials extension
To cancel a Callback Request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Callback Cancellation code (default = 769 [UK/
HK] or 769# [ Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Replace the handset .
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to Voice
Mail. Call Forwarding can be set or cancelled under the following conditions from either your own
extension or from an alternate extension:
•
•
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls
When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately
forwarded.
Operation
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
227
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 721 (UK/HK) or 721# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 741 (UK/HK) or 741# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 255.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 751 (UK/HK) or 751# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - Busy
When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.
228
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 722 (UK/HK) or 722# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 742 (UK/HK) or 742#(Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you want to forward
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 255.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 732 (UK/HK) or 732# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 752 (UK/HK) or 752# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call Forward - No Answer timer
expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
229
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 723 (UK/HK) or 723# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 743 (UK/HK) or 743# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward
4. Dial the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 255.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 733 (UK/HK) or 733# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 753 (UK/HK) or 753# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
The System allows you to set or cancel both Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your
own extension in one step.
230
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the CF/DND All Clear code (default = 7**).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding DND activated.For
example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.
•
If forwarding to an outside number, the destination number must be pre-programmed into a
System Speed Dial (SSD) code.
•
Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.
•
You can set Call Forwarding - All Calls while Call Forwarding - No Answer and/or Call
Forwarding - Busy are set. Cancelling one mode only affects that mode; however, the other
modes will remain set until cancelled individually.
•
An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A
manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.
•
If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call
Forward No Answer destination.
•
You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 * *.
Call Hold
Description
The system provides the following types of Call Hold:
•
System Hold
•
Floating Hold
•
Exclusive Hold
•
Broker’s Hold
•
Call Park (Station)
System Hold
You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on
System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
231
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold:
Action
1. Press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code (default = *0).
3. Enter the trunk number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Floating Hold
Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension by
dialling the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call.
Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page. The call can
be placed in a Floating Hold “orbit” and that orbit number announced during the page. The paged
party can then pick up the call by dialling the orbit number.
Operation
To place a call on Floating Hold:
Action
1. Press the HOLD key.
232
Result
Intercom dial tone
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:
Action
1.
Result
Enter the Floating Hold Answer feature access code
(default = *9).
2. Enter the Floating Hold orbit number (001-576 (CPC-288/
576), 01-96 (CPC-96) or 001-099 (CPC-288/576) or 01-09
(CPC-96) (See considerations below.)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The number of floating hold orbits available may very depending on the Station Park/Floating
Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025). The station park pickup access code can set to *9
(default). The “*9” access code operates as follows
System Size
Virtual Line Number and Operation
01-09: Floating Hold pick up
10-96: Station Park Hold pick up purpose
001-099: Floating Hold pick up
100-576: Station Park Hold pick up purpose
96
Above 96
Exclusive Hold
With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used
to hold trunk calls and extension calls.
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
233
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Broker’s Hold
Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the
HOLD key.
Operation
To place a call on Broker’s Hold:
Action
Result
1. Pick up the first call.
2. Press the HOLD key.
First call on hold
3. Pick up the second call.
4. Press the HOLD key.
Second call on hold, first call retrieved
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Park
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient
of the call.
Trunk, extension, and network calls may be parked.
There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the ICX. One way is to park the call at the
receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialling the park answer
code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial
the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call. Beginning in Version 5.0, an
Extension Group Pickup code allows the user to pick up a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing
calls), a Hold Recall, and a Station Park Recall.
To park a call on this extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
• Current call on hold
2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default = 771 [UK/
HK] or 771# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
234
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default
= 773 (UK/HK) or 773# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
OR...
Enter the Call Park/Floating Hold Answer feature access
code (default = *9).
2. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
• Connected to parked call
To park a call at another extension:
Action
1. Press the HOLD key.
Result
• Current call on hold
2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default = 774
[UK/HK] or 774# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call.
4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a transferred call park:
Action
Result
1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default = 772
[UK/HK] or 772# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• Connected to parked call
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
You cannot park more than one call at a time.
No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone.
If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held
call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the
parked call.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
235
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Call Pickup
Description
The System allows the following types of call pickup:
•
Extension Group Pickup
•
Extension Direct Pickup
•
Trunk Group Pickup
•
Trunk Direct Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup
group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.
Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:
•
Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension
group.
•
Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own
extension group.
•
Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension
group.
Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default
= 701 [UK/HK] or 701# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code
(default = 702 [UK/HK] or 702# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
236
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To use Specified Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703 [UK/
HK] or 703# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the
call is ringing.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Extension Group Pickup - 12 / CCU - maximum 72 group / 6 CCU configuration
Extension Direct Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialling the number of
the ringing extension.
Operation
To use Extension Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704
[UK/HK] or 704# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Group Pickup
Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO
incoming trunk group.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
237
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To use Trunk Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code (default = 709 [UK/
HK] or 709# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Direct Pickup
Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number.
Operation
To use Trunk Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code (default = *0).
3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system hold)
trunk.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
238
Call on exclusive hold cannot be picked up.
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Call Transfer
Description
The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The
transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to
transfer a call to a busy extension.)
Supervised Transfer
When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party
answers, then he/she announces the call.
Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Seize a trunk and dial the number to which the call is to be
transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
Unsupervised Transfer
When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party
answers.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
239
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
Operation
To camp a call onto a busy extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-On activated,
enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/
HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Camp-on tone heard at called extension
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
240
On-Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service (COS),
he/she cannot complete the transfer.
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
•
If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call
will recall to the transferring extension.
•
If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert
to the Attendant group.
•
If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.
•
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.
•
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call
will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension
221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to
extension 225.
•
Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.
•
If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension, the call will camp on to the busy
extension.
•
To transfer to a outside party, it is best to use supervised transfer. If the trunk-to-trunk on-hook
transfer restriction is enabled, a blind transfer will result in the loss of the second call but the
second call will be kept on hold. If not enabled and the second outside party is busy, the
transferred party will receive busy.
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the
called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be
automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the
first call on hold and then answer the waiting call.
The System provides two types of call waiting:
•
Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to
the busy extension. You need only to remain on the line.
•
Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy
extension.
Operation
To set Automatic Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
241
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To set Manual Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/
HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key again to be connected to the waiting call.
• Current call placed on hold
• Connected to waiting call
OR....
Press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “Camping a Call Onto a
Busy Extension” on page 240.
Conference Calls
Version 3.0 and higher
Description
Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard
system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the
optional Conference Card is installed, additional parties up to a total of 8 can participate in a
conference call.
Any combination of extensions and trunk lines can be in the conference as long as the original
extension is in the conference and the total number of parties does not exceed 8. Only one operation is
used to establish and add to a conference. You simply have to place the current call on hold, dial the
next party and press the CONF key. No different operation or access code is required to add
additional parties to the call.
When no optional conference card is installed, the system supports the following types of three-party
conference calls:
•
242
3 extensions
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
•
2 extensions and 1 trunk
•
1 extension and 2 trunks
When the optional 8-party conference card is installed, the System supports any combination of
conference calls, except all outside lines.
Operation
To establish a conference call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key or the line key of your
current call.
2. If adding an outside party, dial a trunk access code.
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call.
4. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
5. To add additional parties, repeat steps 1-4
6. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.
To establish a two-party private conversation from a 3-party conference:
Action
1. While on a call, press the CONF + 1 (2) to have a private
conversation with the CNF 1 (2) party.
Result
You and the selected party are in a separate conversation from the other conference parties.
2. To reestablish the conference, press the CONF key.
To remove a Busy Tone (Hang up) from an 8-party conference :
Action
1. During an conference with more than 3 parties, press
CONF + (n) (where n is the number 1-8 for the conference
parties) to individually select a conference party.
Result
The other party is placed on hold.
2. If you did not select the conference party that is giving busy
tone, re-enter the conference by pressing the CONF key.
3. If you selected the conference party that is giving busy tone,
hang up and then go off-hook again and press the CONF
key to re-enter the conference call.
Hardware Requirements
•
A Conference Card (VB-44120) must be installed in the System in order to conference more than
three parties.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
243
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
If all the internal parties hang up, the conference call will be disconnected. If the internal party
remains in the conversation, the conference call remains in progress.
•
When three parties are conferenced, a built-in 3-party conference circuit is used. If no 3-party
conference circuit is available, a conference cannot be established.
•
When a fourth party is added, the conference is moved to a conference circuit on the 8-party
conference card. If an 8-party conference circuit is not available, a fourth party cannot be added
to a conference.
•
Once an 8-party conference circuit is used, it continues to be used as long as the conference
continues.
•
An 8-party conference card supports up to four 8-party conference circuits. However, the card
must be placed in cabinet slots 1, 5, or 9 to support more than one 8-party conference circuit (and
jumpered accordingly).
Do-Not-Disturb
Description
You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND
is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.
Operation
To set DND for your own extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or
720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for your own extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or
720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
244
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To set DND for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740
[UK/HK] or 740# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750
[UK/HK] or 750# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Forced DND override is available.
•
DND override function is available by Busy Override code.
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
Description
Dial Pulse (DP) to Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Signal Conversion allows you to switch from
DP to DTMF signalling when using a DP trunk. For instance, if you dial into a Voice Mail system
using a DP trunk, you can switch to DTMF signalling to communicate with the Voice Mail system.
(The System can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and outgoing
timers).
Operation
To switch from DP to DTMF dialling:
Action
Result
1. Press the * key or the # key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
245
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Flash
Description
You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically
reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FLASH key.
Trunk programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to extension
dial tone status.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Hot Line
Description
Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number
simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.
Operation
To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Automatically connected to pre-assigned
extension or speed dial number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
246
N/A
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Intercom Calling
Description
The System provides two methods of intercom calling:
•
Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.
•
Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating
extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone
calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone
calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access
code.
Operation
To make a call using Intercom Calling:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to
make a voice call, enter 1.
Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to
make a tone call, enter 1.
4. Speak when your call is answered
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.
•
You cannot change from voice call to tone call.
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dallied by pressing the
REDIAL key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
247
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To automatically redial the last number dialled:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
OR...
Result
Outside dial tone (if trunk access code
entered)
Enter a trunk access code.
2. Press the REDIAL key.
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both
intercom and trunk calls, or trunk calls only.
Message Waiting/Callback
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication
at that extension, requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a message waiting indication:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Ring or busy tone
3. While the telephone is still ringing, or when you hear the
busy tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4
[UK/HK] or 4# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
248
Message lamp flashes at called extension
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To answer a message waiting indication (callback):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6).
• Telephone automatically dials extension that sent message waiting indication
• Message lamp goes off when your call
is answered
To cancel a Callback Message:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Message lamp goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party Voice Mail. See “Voice Mail Integration
(Third Party)” on page 72.
Offhook Signalling
Description
Offhook Signalling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another trunk call has arrived or a
call is camped on.
Operation
After receiving an offhook signal during a call:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key.
2. Hang up and then go off-hook to answer call.
Note: For details about handling multiple calls, see “Call Hold” on page 231.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
249
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The trunk call type may be either multiple ring, direct, or camp-on.
•
The system does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:
• During a conference call
• During an OHVA or Busy override
• Data Privacy is enabled
• The receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.
Offhook Voice Announce
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice
Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear. You can also
transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature.
Operation
To make an OHVA :
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy signal
3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK]
or 8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
4. Make your announcement
To transfer a call using OHVA:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Current call on hold
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is being transferred.
Busy signal
3. Enter OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK] or
8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) and announce the call to
be transferred.
4. If transfer is not accepted, press the FL/R key.
Transfer cancelled
5. Replace the handset.
250
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
If Onhook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the
OHVA hangs up.
•
If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set time limit, then return to
the extension sending the OHVA by Transfer Recall Timer.
•
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
•
If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.
Onhook Dialling
Description
Onhook Dialling allows users to dial without lifting the handset. However, the Digital Single Line
Telephone (DSLT) does not have a microphone so you must lift the handset to talk.
Operation
To use onhook dialling:
Action
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia] or 81-84), or dial an extension
number.
3. If you entered a trunk access code in step 2, dial the phone
number. Otherwise, proceed to step 4.
4. When the call is answered, lift the handset to talk.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Paging
Description
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
251
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages
are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of
an external paging system connected to the System.
Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
To make a page:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).
3. Enter the number of the desired paging group (0-9).
4. Make your announcement.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Meet-Me Answer
To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).
Connected to specified party
Hardware Requirements
•
External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.
Considerations
•
If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to paging groups 0-9
through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.
•
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
•
Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another
extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal.
•
Beginning with Version 4.5 and higher, the paging system can be set to “timeout” if a page
remains unanswered for a specified length of time (0 to 255 seconds). If this feature is set and the
timeout period has elapsed, the page originator’s handset will emit a Fast Busy Tone.
Room Monitoring
Description
252
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
This feature allows the user to monitor the sounds in a room from another extension or room. The
transmitter in the telephone handset is used as a remote “microphone” for monitoring these sounds.
To activate this feature, the monitored extension must enable the Room Monitor feature before the
monitoring extension can listen to the sounds in the room. The monitored extension can be enabled
using a SLT, DSLT, or Key Telephone. No special programming is required to allow an extension to
enable the monitored mode.
Operation
To set up the monitored extension:
Action
1. Dial the monitored extension access code (default 775),
OR...
Note: The handset must be off-hook to activate the
Room Monitor feature.
Result
You will hear a confirmation tone after
the monitored extension has enabled the
Room Monitor feature. (If the monitored
extension has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)
Press an FF key assigned with the monitored access code
Additional operations may be performed from the monitored extension when it is in monitored mode:
Action
Result
1. Placing the handset back on-hook or pressing ON/OFF
Monitored mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, PROG, CONF, MIC, MENU,
PREV, NEXT, REDIAL, MEMORY, FF Key
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitored mode.
3. FL/R
Monitored mode is cancelled. Dial tone is
returned to handset.
Note:
When a monitored extension receives a call, the caller hears a busy tone.
To set up the monitoring extension:
Action
Result
1. Dial the monitoring extension access code (default 776)
and the extension number of the monitored extension, OR...
The monitoring extension enters the monitoring mode. (If the monitored extension
has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)
Press an FF key assigned the monitored access code and the
extension number of the monitored extension, OR...
While the handset is on-hook, press an FF key assigned to
the Room Monitor followed by the monitored extension
number.
The monitoring extension will automatically enter the monitoring mode.
The monitoring operation can be allowed or denied by extension COS and is controlled by the Busy
Override feature. If Busy Override is denied and the user attempts to monitor an extension, the user
will hear a fast busy tone.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
253
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Additional operations may be performed from the monitoring extension when it is in monitoring
mode:
Action
Result
1. Placing the handset back On Hook or pressing ON/OFF
Monitoring mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, PROG, CONF, MIC, MENU,
PREV, NEXT, FL/R, REDIAL, MEMORY, FF Key
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitoring mode.
3. LINE
Monitoring mode is cancelled. Dial tone
is returned to handset.
Services available on the monitoring extension while the Room Monitoring feature is active:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Camp On
Call Back
Message displayed on LCD when extension is busy
Message Waiting On/Off
Cancellation of DND and Call Forwarding by another extension
Busy Transfer
DIL Incoming Call (Queuing)
Services NOT available to either the monitored or monitoring extension when this feature is active:
•
•
•
•
Busy Override
On-Hook VA
The ability to receive a text message
Silent Monitor
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Allow/deny Busy Override Send—Monitoring extension)
FF1-2-02: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 1
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 2
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
254
If the monitored extension is placed on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the
monitoring extension will hear a fast busy tone.
If the monitoring extension goes on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitored
extension will remain in the monitored mode, and can be accessed by any other extension
allowed to access the room monitoring mode.
A room cannot be monitored from more than one extension at a time. If an attempt is made to
monitor an extension while the extension is being monitored, the user will hear a fast busy tone.
ISDN (s-point) extensions cannot access the Room Monitor feature in either the monitor or
monitored modes.
A monitoring extension cannot forward a call on hold to a monitored extension.
A monitored extension cannot receive a transferred call.
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
•
If DND is enabled on either the monitoring or monitored extension, DND status is displayed on
the calling extension’s telephone.
•
If the monitoring or monitored extension has an absence message set, the absence message will
be displayed on the calling extension’s telephone.
Speed Dialling
Description
The System supports the following speed dial features:
•
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
•
System Speed Dial (SSD)
•
Speed Dial Linking
•
Speed Dial Name Assignment
Personal Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored
in PSD bins numbered 80-99.
Operation
To assign PSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/
HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
255
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To delete a PSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2.
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/
HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
•
Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters. The following table reflects which keys to
use.
To indicate . . .
256
Enter/Press
Digit or character
0, 1 - 9, *, #
Intercom Level *
MEMORY * #
MCO Code 9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)**
MEMORY * 0
MCO Code 81**
MEMORY * 71
MCO Code 82**
MEMORY * 72
MCO Code 83**
MEMORY * 73
MCO Code 84**
MEMORY * 74
Pause
REDIAL
DP - DTMF Code
MEMORY * *
SSD Code
MEMORY
NN(N)
Hyphen (-)
PROG
DTMF Conversion After the
Other Party Answers
MEMORY * 3
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
*
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Indicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an extension
number. (Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level.) See Note below.
** Indicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should
seize the next available trunk when dialling. (Not needed if your System is set for Trunk
Level.) See Note below.
Note: The System has two levels - Trunk Level and Intercom Level. If set at Trunk Level
(default), you must enter the code for Intercom Level when programming a feature access code
or extension number for speed dialling. If the System is set at Intercom Level, you must enter the
MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed dialling.
System Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be
programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD
numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins
000-799.
Operation
To assign SSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/
HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the MEMORY key.
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
5. Complete call and replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
key.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
257
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To delete an SSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/
HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or -799).
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions.
Speed Dial Linking
You can automatically link together up to 5 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers
longer than 24 characters. You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key
or by entering the speed dial bin number.
Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the
keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier
access codes, etc.
Note: Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin, the SSD bins must already have been
programmed with the appropriate speed dial information.
Operation
To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin:
Action
Result
1. Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
3. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/
HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Press the MEMORY key.
6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799) that contains
the first part of the number to be called.
7. Repeat steps 5-6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs
to be dialled.
8. Press the HOLD key when finished.
258
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs:
Action
Result
1. If necessary, select the trunk group (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (Normally the
trunk is selected by the speed dial numbers.)
2. Press the MEMORY key.
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
To manually link speed dials together:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the MEMORY key, then enter the PSD or SSD bin
number.
4. Press the MEMORY key and enter the PSD or SSD codes
to dial the parts of the phone number until it is completed.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
259
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Station Lockout
Description
Use the Station Lockout feature to limit use of your phone by others when you are away from your
telephone. When the Station Lockout feature is in use, the TRS (Call Barring) Class of your telephone
is changed. Anyone using your telephone is limited to the calling abilities defined by this Lockout
TRS (Call Barring) Class.
In addition, with the appropriate COS, you can set or cancel Station Lockout for other telephones.
To activate Station Lockout feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout feature code (default = 746 [UK/
HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Replace the handset.
To cancel Station Lockout feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel feature code (default =
746 [UK/HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) .
3. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
security code.
4. Replace the handset.
To activate Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Set for another extension feature
code (default = 747 [UK/HK] or 747# [Taiwan, Malaysia,
Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
4. Replace the handset.
260
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To cancel Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel for another extension feature code (default = 748 [UK/HK] or 748# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
4. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
security code.
5. Replace the handset.
To change the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
Security Code Change code (default =749 [UK/HK] or
749# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the current Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.
4. Enter the new Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
security code.
5. Replace the handset.
Considerations
•
Walking TRS (Call Barring) and Station Lockout use the same security code.
•
If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, the phone will issue a busy tone.
•
If station lockout is set, the phone is limited to the Station Lockout TRS (Call Barring) Class
outside calling abilities. This TRS (Call Barring) Class should be carefully selected to only allow
the desired call types.
•
Without Walking TRS (Call Barring) /Station Lockout Security Code, you cannot set the Station
Lockout feature.
•
You cannot override station lockout using Walking TRS (Call Barring) feature.
Step Call (Reset Call)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
261
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To use Step Call (Reset Call) to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial an extension number.
Busy tone
3. Dial the last digit of the next extension number.
Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The second extension called using the Step Call (Reset Call) feature must have the same number
of digits as the first extension.
•
If you program the System for Step Call (Reset Call), the following features are not available:
Camp-on (Ext. no. + 2 [UK/HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]), Callback Request (Ext.
no. + 3 [UK/HK] or 3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]), Message Waiting (Ext. no. + 4 [UK/HK]
or 4# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], Message Waiting (Priority for VM) (Ext. no. + 5 [UK/HK]
or 5# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]), Intercom Busy Override (Ext. no. + 9 [UK/HK] or 9#
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Timed Reminder Call
Description
Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.
Operation
To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).
3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.
(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1
AM, 1300 for 1 PM.)
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
262
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
An alarm tone (default = 60 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.
An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3
minutes later.
Trunk Access
Description
The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside call:
•
•
Direct Trunk Access
MCO Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access
to test trunks or to access data trunks.
Operation
To use Direct Trunk Access:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Enter the Direct Trunk Access code (default = 88).
3. Enter the desired trunk number.
Outside dial tone
4. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
263
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Trunk Access
The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle trunk
from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code.
Operation
To seize an idle trunk:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the desired trunk access number (default = 9 [UK/
HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (See Table
22.)
Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-CCU configuration. These lines can be
divided into 99 different trunk groups.
Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines.
Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes. System defaults for MCO
trunk access codes are displayed in the following table.
MCO1 can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature.
MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.
Table 22. MCO Trunk Access Codes
MCO Group
MCO1
MCO2
MCO3
MCO4
MCO5
264
Trunk Access Code
9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia)
81
82
83
84
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Trunk Queuing
Description
When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, and Indonesia])
and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy, the System can call you when a line becomes free.
Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings.
Operation
To set Trunk Queuing:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or
3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.
To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Outside dial tone
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be cancelled.
•
The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call
using the MCO Trunk Access feature.
Universal Night Answer to Page
Description
During night mode, Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls for selected trunks to ring
external paging speakers.
Universal Night Answer calls can be picked up from any extension, provided the extension’s Class of
Service (COS) allows UNA answer.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
265
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To answer a UNA call:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the UNA to Page Pickup code (default = 705 [UK/
HK] or 705# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Call is received.
Hardware Requirements
•
External paging speakers and associated equipment are not provided with the ICX; they must be
purchased separately.
Considerations
•
The UNA Ringing port can be specified by the caller’s tenant group or by the trunk ringing
assignment.
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class of Service (COS)allows an extension
user to “carry” his or her toll restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS feature can be used, a Walking TRS (Call Barring) code
must be entered at your extension before using dialling privileges at another extension.
Operation
To use a Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension
other than your own.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring) Access code (default
= 87).
3. Dial your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking code (0001-9999)
5. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
6. Dial the phone number.
Walking TRS COS remains in effect until
you replace the handset.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
266
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Considerations(Call Barring)
•
•
•
•
•
The same Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code can be used on more than one extension.
Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.
ARS and TRS (Call Barring) dialling privileges follow the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS.
Before entering a new Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code, you must first clear the existing
code.
When Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension
number) appears in Call Logging.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
267
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
268
Section 700 - Operation
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Single Line Telephones (SLTs) are industry-standard 2500 sets. SLTs are not equipped with feature
keys or line keys, so basic telephone operations are performed by pressing dialpad keys and/or using
the switchhook.
This chapter describes the following features that are available with SLTs.
Topic
Page
Absence Message
271
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
272
273
Verified Account Codes
273
Attendant Group Calls
275
Busy Override
275
Callback Request
276
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding - All Calls
277
Call Forwarding - Busy
278
Call Forwarding - No Answer
279
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
280
277
Call Hold
System Hold
281
281
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)
282
Exclusive Hold
283
Broker’s Hold
284
Call Park
284
Call Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
286
Extension Direct Pickup
287
Trunk Group Pickup
288
Trunk Direct Pickup
288
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
289
286
289
Unsupervised Transfer
290
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
291
Conference Calls
293
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
294
Flash Send
295
Intercom Calling
296
Last Number Redial
297
Message Waiting/Callback
298
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
269
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
270
Page
Offhook Signalling
299
Offhook Voice Announce
300
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
301
301
Room Monitoring
302
Speed Dialling
Personal Speed Dial
303
304
System Speed Dial
305
Speed Dial Linking
306
Station Lockout
307
Step Call (Reset Call)
309
Timed Reminder Call
309
Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
310
MCO Trunk Access
311
311
Trunk Queuing
312
Universal Night Answer to Page
313
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
314
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Absence Message
Description
Extension users can leave text messages related to their phones when they are away. When the
unattended extension is dialed, the text message displays on the caller’s phone. Any one of the
following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 have no default message text. All the messages
can be changed through system programming.
Table 23. Absence Messages
Message No.
Message Text Displayed on
Called Party’s Key
Telephone
Message No.
Message Text Displayed on
Called Party’s Key
Telephone
0
In Meeting
5
Absence_No_5
1
At Lunch
6
Absence_No_6
2
Out of Office
7
Absence_No_7
3
Vacation
8
Absence_No_8
4
Another Office
9
Absence_No_9
Optionally, a return time can be input. Example Return Times for Absence Messages include:
Input
Display
No input
Return
9
Return 9:00
11
Return 11:00
615
Return 6:15
1035
Return 10:35
Operation
To set an Absence Message
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729 [UK/HK]
or 729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the Absence Message number. (See Table 23 above.)
4. If desired, enter the 4-digit returning time.
5. Flash the hookswitch.
6. Replace the handset.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
271
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel an Absence Message
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729 [UK/HK]
or 729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Flash the hookswitch.
4. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1 (System): Extension Class of Service Setting
FF3 (Extension): Extension Class of Service Assignment
FF8 (Maintenance): Absence Messages
Considerations
•
•
•
Calling parties without a display get a busy signal, rather than the Absence Message.
Regardless of setting an Absence Message on a DDI/DIL extension, DDI/DIL calls are routed
according to the trunk ringing setting.
An absence message may also be cancelled by dialling 7**. This cancels Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
and Call Forwarding-All Calls as well.
Account Codes
Description
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers
called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the Call
Logging record.
In addition verified account codes may be used to change the Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call
Barring) level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted.
Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.
This feature works with Call Logging. Before making an outgoing call, a station user can silently
enter an accounting or client billing code. Then later, the Call Logging reports will show the Code
dialled for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.
There are two different types of account codes: Non-Verified and Verified Account Codes. Prior to
Version 5.0, the maximum amount of account code numbers for both types could range from 1-10
digits. Beginning with Version 5.0, a second mode has been added that allows the user to set the
maximum amount of account code numbers from 1-4 digits. An account code error will occur when
more than the maximum number of digits are entered.
272
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Codes aren’t checked by the system for validity. Depending on the setting, the user can
enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced
Account Codes (the user must enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can
enter a code, but doesn’t have to, for each call).
Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to outgoing calls. The user either enters the Code before
accessing an outside line (for forced or voluntary Codes).
Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4-digit or 10-digit code that has been
preprogrammed into an Account Code Table. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything
from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program
these codes with their own TRS (Call Barring) Class assignment so that, when entered, they will
override the extension’s TRS (Call Barring) Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float”
from phone to phone, placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code
before making a call.)
You can assign Non-Verified Account codes to outgoing calls only. To assign an account code to an
outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call.
Operation
To enter an account code before making a call:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
5. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
6. Dial the phone number.
Verified Account Codes
Stations restricted from outside call origination by TRS (Call Barring) can be allowed to make
outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS (Call Barring). After a call is
made, the Call Logging record for the call will show the verified account code.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
273
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To make an outside call that requires an account code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (max. 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
5. Enter trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
6. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
A Call Logging printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code
records.
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-19: TRS (Call Barring) Class for Forced Account Code
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
•
FF3: Forced Account
FF3: Verified Account
•
FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes with TRS (Call Barring) Class
Considerations
•
•
Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.
Even though up to 10 digits may be entered, the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits
only.
•
Account codes will be cancelled after using trunk queuing.-
•
•
Account codes are not available for a Dial Pulse SLT.
SLT telephones can only use account codes with outgoing calls only.
•
Account Codes interact with TRS (Call Barring) as shown in the following table:
Forced or Not Forced
Verified or
Non-Verified
Not Forced
Non-Verified
TRS (Call Barring) Class
No Account Entry
Account Entry
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Extension Port Based TRS
(Call Barring) Class
Verified
Forced
Non-Verified
Verified
274
Account Code Based TRS
(Call Barring) Class
TRS (Call Barring) Class
for Forced Account Code
(FF1 0 19 0001)
ICX (International) issued June 2000
Extension Port Based TRS
(Call Barring) Class
Account Code Based TRS
(Call Barring) Class
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Attendant Group Calls
Description
You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialling the designated attendant number.
Operation
To call an attendant group:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0 [UK/HK] or 9
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3-0: Extension Number
FF5-0: Attendant Hunt Groups
Considerations
•
•
Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.
The attendant pilot number is flexible.
•
If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant
group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialled.
Attendant calls are always tone calls (i.e., not voice calls).
•
Busy Override
Description
Busy Override allows you to break into another user’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent
information or to create three-party conference calls.
Operation
To set Extension Busy Override:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
ICX-50-700
Result
Intercom dial tone
ICX (International) issued June 2000
275
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9 [UK/HK] or 9#
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• Alert tone sounds to both extensions
(System programming required)
• Connection to both parties
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Splash Tone (Busy Override)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Extension COS
•
FF3: Data Security
Considerations
•
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
•
The default for the override alert tone is off. If the override alert tone is enabled, the tone will be
sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
Callback Request
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can have the System call you back when that extension becomes
free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.
Operation
To set a Callback Request:
Action
276
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or
3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Ringback tone
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
System calls back when called extension
becomes free
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To respond to the callback request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
System automatically redials extension
To cancel a Callback Request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Callback cancellation code (default = 769 [UK/HK]
or 769# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Replace the handset .
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Receive)
•
FF3-0: Extension COS
•
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan (Callback Cancel)
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to voice
mail. Call Forwarding can be set or cancelled under the following conditions from either your own
extension or from an alternate extension:
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
•
Call Forwarding - Busy
•
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding - All Calls
When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately
forwarded.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
277
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 721 (UK/HK) or 721# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 276.)
5. Replace the handset.
To cancel Call Forwarding - All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 751 (UK/HK) or 751# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, enter
the extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Call Forwarding - Busy
When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.
278
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To set Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 722 (UK/HK) or 722# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 742 (UK/HK) or 742# (Taiwan, Malaysia, indonesia).
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you want to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 276.)
5. Replace the handset.
To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 732 (UK/HK) or 732# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 752 (UK/HK) or 752# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call forward No Answer timer
expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
279
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 723 (UK/HK) or 723# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia).
• For another extension, enter 743 (UK/HK) or 743# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Dial the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instructions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 276.)
5. Replace the handset.
To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 733 (UK/HK) or 733# (Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia].
• For another extension, enter 753 (UK/HK) or 753# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).
3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your own
extension in one step.
To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
280
Result
Intercom dial tone
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Action
Result
2. Enter the CF/DND All Clear code (default = 7**).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All Calls)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Busy)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/No Answer)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Other)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3-0: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated.
For example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.
•
Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.
•
You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 * *.
•
An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A
manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.
•
If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call
Forward No Answer destination.
Call Hold
Description
The system provides the following types of Call Hold:
•
System Hold
•
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)
•
Exclusive Hold
•
Broker’s Hold
•
Call Park (Station)
System Hold
You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on
System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
281
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold:
Action
Result
1. If onhook, go offhook.
Intercom dial tone
2. Hookflash.
Retrieve call
To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code (default = *0).
3. Enter the trunk number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Operation for SLT)
•
FF3-0: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)
Floating Hold allows calls to be placed in a hold orbit (position) for retrieval elsewhere in the system.
Floating Hold is most commonly used by the attendant group when they are unable to locate the
desired party. If the desired party does not answer his/her phone, the attendant places the caller on
Floating Hold and asks over the paging system that the desired party dial *9XXX to retrieve the held
call.
Note: Single Line Telephone (SLT) positions are not able to place a call on Floating Hold. However,
an SLT can retrieve a call on floating.
282
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Operation
To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Enter *9 followed by the Floating Hold Orbit number (001576 (CPC-288/576), 01-96 (CPC-96) or 001-099 (CPC288/
576) or 01-09 (CPC-96) (See considerations below.)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer.
Considerations
•
The number of floating hold orbits available may very depending on the Station Park/Floating
Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025). The station park pickup access code can set to *9
(default). The “*9” access code operates as follows:
System Size
Virtual Line Number and Operation
01-09 Floating Hold pick up
10-96: Station Park Hold pick up purpose
001-099 Floating Hold pick up
100-576: Station Park Hold pick up purpose
96
Above 96
Exclusive Hold
With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used
to hold trunk calls and extension calls.
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. If onhook, lift the handset.
2. Hookflash.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
283
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Control on SLTs)
Considerations
•
Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive.
Broker’s Hold
Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by hookflash.
Operation
To place a call on Broker’s Hold:
Action
Result
1. Pick up the first call.
2. Hookflash.
First call on hold
3. Pick up the second call.
4. Hookflash.
Second call on hold, first call retrieved
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
F1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Control on SLTs - Broker’s Hold or Conference)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
If Broker’s Hold is enabled, it is not possible to establish a conference call from an SLT position.
Call Park
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient
of the call.
Trunk, extension, and network calls may be parked.
There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the ICX. One way is to park the call at the
receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialling the park answer
code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial
the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call. In Version 5.0, an Extension
Group Pickup code allows the user to pick up a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing calls), a Hold
Recall, and a Station Park Recall.
284
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To park a call on this extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the hookswitch.
Result
• Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default = 771 [UK/
HK] or 771# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset
Result
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default
= 773 [UK/HK] or 773# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
OR...
Enter the Call Park/Floating Hold Answer feature access
code (default = *9).
2. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
• Connected to parked call
To park a call at another extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the hookswitch.
Result
• Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default = 774
[UK/HK] or 774# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call.
4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a transferred call park:
Action
Result
1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default = 772
[UK/HK] or 772# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• Connected to parked call
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1 (System): Extension Park Hold Recall Timer
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
285
Chapter 7. SLT Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer
Considerations
•
You cannot park more than one call at a time.
•
If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held
call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the
parked call.
Call Pickup
Description
The System allows the following types of call pickup:
•
Extension Group Pickup
•
Extension Direct Pickup
•
Trunk Group Pickup
•
Trunk Direct Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup
group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.
Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:
•
Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension
group.
•
Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own
extension group.
•
Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension
group.
Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default
= 701 [UK/HK] or 701# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
286
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code
(default = 702 [UK/HK] or 702# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To use Specified Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703 [UK/
HK] or 703# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the
call is ringing.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Call Pickup Group Assignment
Considerations
•
Extension Group Pickup - 12 / CCU - maximum 72 group / 6 CCU configuration
Extension Direct Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialling the number of
the ringing extension.
Operation
To use Extension Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704
[UK/HK] or 704# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
287
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Group Pickup
Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO
incoming trunk group.
Operation
To use Trunk Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code (default = 709 [UK/
HK] or 709# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF5-3: MCO Inbound Trunk Group Members
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Direct Pickup
Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number.
288
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Operation
To use Trunk Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code (default = *0).
3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system) trunk.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
Calls on exclusive hold cannot be picked up.
Call Transfer
Description
The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The
transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to
transfer a call to a busy extension.)
Supervised Transfer
When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party
answers, then he/she announces the call.
Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
289
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter trunk access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
5. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
Unsupervised Transfer
When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party
answers.
Operation
To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter trunk access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
290
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
Operation
To camp a call onto a busy extension:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-On activated,
enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/
HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Camp-on tone heard at called extension
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Ringback)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Talk)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Camp-on)
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
On-Hook Transfer must be enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service
(COS).
If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call
will recall to the transferring extension.
If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert
to the Attendant group.
If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call
will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension
221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to
extension 225.
Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the
called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
291
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also place the first call on hold by
Hookflashing and then answering the waiting call.
The System provides two types of call waiting:
•
Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal.
You need only to remain on the line.
Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy
extension.
•
Operation
To use Automatic Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To use Manual Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/
HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset.
2. Lift the handset again to be connected to the waiting call.
OR....
• Current call placed on hold
• Connected to waiting call
Hookflash.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
292
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF1-0-03: Extension COS
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 7. SLT Features
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “To camp a call onto a
busy extension:” on page 266.
Conference Calls
Description
Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard
system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time.
Note: The SLT does not support 8 party conference calling.
Any combination of extensions and trunk lines can be in the conference as long as the original
extension is in the conference and the total number of parties does not exceed 3. Only one operation is
used to establish and add to a conference. You simply have to place the current call on hold, dial the
next party and press the CONF key. No different operation or access code is required to add
additional parties to the call.
When no optional conference card is installed, the system supports the following types of three-party
conference calls:
•
•
•
3 extensions
2 extensions and 1trunk
1 extension and 2 trunks
Operation
To establish a conference call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash to place your current call on hold.
2. If adding an outside party, dial a trunk access code (default
= 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call.
4. Hookflash when your call is answered.
5. To add additional parties, repeat steps 1-4
6. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3: Extension COS
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
293
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
If all the internal parties hang up, the conference call will be disconnected. If the internal party
remains in the conversation, the conference call remains in progress.
•
When three parties are conferenced, a built-in 3-party conference circuit is used. If no 3-party
conference circuit is available, a conference cannot be established.
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
Description
You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND
is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.
Operation
To set DND for your own extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or 720#
[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Replace the handset.
To cancel DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or
720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
DND/CD LED light goes off
3. Replace the handset.
To set DND for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740
[UK/HK] or 740# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
294
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To cancel DND for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750
[UK/HK] or 750# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear Other)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3-0: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
Forced DND override is available.
DND override function is available by Busy Override code.
Flash Send
Description
Flash send allows you to send a flash to a trunk.
Operation
To send a flash on an trunk:
Action
Result
1. Hookflash to place the current trunk call on hold.
Dial tone is returned
2. Enter the SLT Flash Send access code (default = 765).
A flash is sent on the trunk. The trunk will
respond according.
Related Programming
•
N/A
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
295
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
N/A
Hot Line
Description
Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number
simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.
Operation
To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Automatically connected to pre-assigned
extension or speed dial number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
N/A
Intercom Calling
Description
The System provides two methods of intercom calling:
•
•
Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.
Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating
extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone
calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone
296
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access
code.
Operation
To make a call using Intercom Calling:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to
make a voice call, enter 1.
Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to
make a tone call, enter 1.
4. Speak when your call is answered
5. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.
You cannot change from voice calling to tone calling.
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialled.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
297
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To automatically redial the last number dialled:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Enter the SLT Redial feature code (default = 712 [UK/HK]
or 712# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Redialing)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both
intercom and trunk calls or trunk calls only.
Message Waiting/Callback
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication
at that extension, requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a message waiting indication:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Ring or busy tone
3. While the telephone is still ringing, or when you hear the
busy tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4
[UK/HK] or 4# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
4. Replace the handset.
298
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To answer a message waiting indication (Callback):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Stutter dial tone
2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6).
Telephone automatically dials extension
that set Message Waiting Indication
To cancel a Callback Message:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Message Wait set/cancel)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Priority Message Wait set/cancel)
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party voice mail. See “Voice Mail Integration
(Third Party)” on page 69.
Offhook Signalling
Description
Offhook Signalling sends a tone over the handset to a busy extension to indicate that a trunk call has
arrived or a call is camped-on. Prior to Version 5.0, users receiving an offhook signal during a
conversation had to end the call before answering an incoming call. Beginning with Version 5.0, users
receiving an offhook signal during conversation can press and release the hook (hookflash) to place
the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
After receiving an offhook signal during a call:
Action
Result
1. Complete the first call and place the handset on hook.
First call is terminated.
2. After the telephone rings, go off hook.
Incoming call is answered.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
299
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
OR
Action
Result
1. Press and release the hook quickly (hookflash).
First call is placed on hold; incoming call
connects.
2. Press and release the hook quickly to go back to the
original call.
First call connects again.
NOTE: The steps outlined above can be performed only when the necessary settings have been
programmed into the system.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF3: Trunk Off-Hook Signal
FF1-1: Off-Hook Signal Timer
Considerations
•
•
•
The trunk call type may be either multiple ring, or DDI/DIL whose destination is set to Auto
camp-on (Call Waiting).
Offhook signalling is not supported for an ISDN terminal.
The System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:
• During a conference call
• During an OHVA or Busy Override
• Data Privacy is enabled
• Receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.
Offhook Voice Announce
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice
Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement.
Operation
To make an OHVA :
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy signal
3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK]
or 8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
4. Make your announcement
300
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Originate
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Receive
FF3 (Extension): Extension COS Assignments
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
•
•
If On hook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the
OHVA hangs up.
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.
Paging
Description
The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages
are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of
an external paging system connected to the System.
Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
To make a page:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).
3. Enter the number of the desired Paging group (0-9).
4. Make your announcement.
5. Replace the handset.
Meet-Me Answer
To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).
Connected to specified party
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
301
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-02: Paging Override
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Paging)
•
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Paging)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF2: Trunk COS
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to Paging groups 0-9
through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.
•
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
•
Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another
extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override.
•
Beginning with Version 4.5 and higher, the paging system can be set to “timeout” if a page
remains unanswered for a specified length of time (0 to 255 seconds). If this feature is set and the
timeout period has elapsed, the page originator’s handset will emit a Fast Busy Tone.
Room Monitoring
Version 4.0 and higher
Description
This feature allows the user to monitor the sounds in a room from another extension or room. The
transmitter in the telephone handset is used as a remote “microphone” for monitoring these sounds.
To activate this feature, the monitored extension must enable the Room Monitor feature before the
monitoring extension can listen to the sounds in the room. The monitored extension can be enabled
using an SLT, DSLT, or Key Telephone. No special programming is required to allow an extension to
enable the monitored mode.
Operation
To set up the monitored extension:
Action
1. Dial the monitored extension access code (default 775)
Note: The handset must be off-hook to activate the
Room Monitor feature.
302
Result
You will hear a confirmation tone after
the monitored extension has enabled the
Room Monitor feature.
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
When a monitored extension receives a call, the caller hears a busy tone. Additional operations may
be performed from the monitored extension when it is in monitored mode:
Action
Result
1. Placing the handset back on-hook
Monitored mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitored mode.
3. FL/R
Monitored mode is cancelled. Dial tone is
returned to handset.
It is not possible to monitor an extension from an SLT telephone.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Allow/deny Busy Override Send—Monitoring extension)
FF1-2-02: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 1
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 2
Considerations
•
•
Be sure all phones that should NOT be allowed to monitor have a COS that restricts monitoring.
If the monitored extension is placed on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the
monitoring extension will hear a fast busy tone.
If the monitoring extension goes on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitored
extension will remain in the monitored mode, and can be accessed by any other extension
allowed to access the room monitoring mode.
A room cannot be monitored from more than one extension at a time. If an attempt is made to
monitor an extension while the extension is being monitored, the user will hear a fast busy tone.
ISDN (s-point) extensions cannot access the Room Monitor feature in either the monitor or
monitored modes.
A monitoring extension cannot forward a call on hold to a monitored extension.
A monitored extension cannot receive a transferred call.
•
•
•
•
•
Speed Dialling
Description
The System supports the following speed dial features:
•
•
•
•
ICX-50-700
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
System Speed Dial (SSD)
Speed Dial Linking
Speed Dial Name Assignment
ICX (International) issued June 2000
303
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Personal Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored
in PSD bins numbered 80-99.
Operation
To assign PSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
2.
Result
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/
HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Dial the number.
5. Hookflash.
6. Replace the handset.
To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To delete a PSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
2.
Result
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/
HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Hookflash.
5. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
304
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 7. SLT Features
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters.
Single Line Telephone (SLT) can only enter 0, 1-9, *, and #. If a pause, MCO code, intercom
level, Dial Pulse (DP) - Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) code, or SSD code needs to be
programmed, use User Maintenance to program the speed dial.
System Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be
programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD
numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins
000-799.
Operation
To assign SSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/
HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Hookflash.
6. Replace the handset.
To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To delete an SSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/
HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
305
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
4. Hookflash.
5. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-15, 16, & 17 SSD Blocks
FF1-0-02 SSD Digits
FF1-0-03 Extension COS (SSD Assignment)
FF8-1-02: SSD Number
FF8-1-02: SSD Name
Considerations
•
The system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions.
Speed Dial Linking
You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers
longer than 24 characters.
Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the
keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier
access codes, etc.
Operation
To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
1. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
3. Enter the desired PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
306
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 7. SLT Features
N/A
Station Lockout
Version 3.0 and higher
Description
Use the Station Lockout feature to limit use of your phone by others when you are away from your
telephone. When the Station Lockout feature is in use, the Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call
Barring) Class of your telephone is changed. Anyone using your telephone is limited to the calling
abilities defined by this Lockout TRS (Call Barring) Class.
In addition, with the appropriate COS, you can set or cancel Station Lockout for other telephones.
To activate Station Lockout feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout feature code (default = 746 [UK/
HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Replace the handset.
To cancel Station Lockout feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel feature code (default =
746 [UK/HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
security code.
4. Replace the handset.
To activate Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Set for another extension feature
code (default = 747 [UK/HK] or 747# [Taiwan, Malaysia,
Indonesia]) .
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
4. Replace the handset.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
307
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel for another extension feature code (default = 748 [UK/HK] or 748# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
4. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
security code.
5. Replace the handset.
To change the Station Lockout security code:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
Security Code Change code (default = 749 [UK/HK] or
749# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
3. Enter the current Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.
4. Enter the new Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout
security code.
5. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout Enable/Disable)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout for another Extension Enable/Disable)
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Code)
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout other Extensions Code)
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Cancel other Extensions Code)
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout Security Code Changing
Code)
FF1-0-19: TRS (Call Barring) Class Under Station Lockout
FF8-1-08: Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout Security Code
Considerations
•
•
•
308
Walking TRS (Call Barring) and Station Lockout use the same security code.
You cannot override station lockout using Walking TRS (Call Barring) feature.
If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, the phone will issue a busy tone.
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
•
If station lockout is set, the phone is limited to the Station Lockout TRS (Call Barring) Class
outside calling abilities. This TRS (Call Barring) Class should be carefully selected to only allow
the desired call types.
•
Without Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout Security Code, you cannot set the Station
Lockout feature.
Step Call (Reset Call)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
Operation
To use Step Call (Reset Call) to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial an extension.
Busy tone
3. Enter the last digit of the next extension.
Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
The second extension called using the Step Call (Reset Call) feature must have the same number
of digits as the first extension.
Timed Reminder Call
Description
Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
309
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).
3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.
(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1
AM, 1300 for 1 PM).
4. Replace the handset.
To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
An alarm tone (default = 60 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.
•
An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.
•
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
•
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3
minutes later.
Trunk Access
Description
The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside call:
310
•
Direct Trunk Access
•
MCO Trunk Access
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Direct Trunk Access
Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access
to test trunks or to access data trunks.
Operation
To use Direct Trunk Access:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Enter the Direct Trunk Access code (default = 88).
3. Enter the desired trunk number.
Outside dial tone
4. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Direct Trunk Access)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Trunk Access
The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle trunk
from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code.
Operation
To seize an idle trunk:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the desired trunk access number (9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (See Table 24 on page
312.)
Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1: MCO Access
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
311
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
FF5-2: MCO Trunk Group (Outbound)
•
FF7: ARS/TRS (Call Barring)
Considerations
•
The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-CCU configuration. These lines can be
divided into 99 different trunk groups.
•
Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines.
•
Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes. System defaults for MCO
trunk access codes are displayed in the following table.
•
MCO1 can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature.
•
MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.
Table 24. MCO Trunk Access Codes
MCO Group
Trunk Access Code
MCO1
9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan,
MCO2
MCO3
MCO4
MCO5
Malaysia, Indonesia)
81
82
83
84
Trunk Queuing
Description
When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) and
all outside lines in a trunk group are busy, the System can call you when a line becomes free. Simply
pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings.
Operation
To set Trunk Queuing:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter trunk access code.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or
3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
4. Replace the handset.
5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.
312
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Outside dial tone
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Trunk Queuing)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be cancelled.
The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call
using the MCO Trunk Access feature.
Universal Night Answer to Page
Description
During night mode, Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls for selected trunks to ring
external paging speakers.
UNA calls can be picked up from any extension, provided the extension’s Class of Service (COS)
allows UNA answer.
Operation
To answer a UNA call:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the UNA to Page Pickup code (default = 705 [UK/
HK] or 705# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).
Call is received.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF2-0: Trunk Ring Assignments
FF1-2: Dial Plan (UNA Pickup Code)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (UNA Pickup)
FF3: Extension COS
FF3: Extension (External Ring Extension Number)
FF1-0-27: System (UNA Ringing Port by Tenant Group)
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
313
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
External paging speakers and associated equipment are not provided with the ICX; they must be
purchased separately.
Considerations
•
The UNA Ringing port can be specified by tenant group or by trunk ring assignment.
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
Description
Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class of Service (COS) allows an extension
user to “carry” his or her toll restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS feature can be used, a Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS
code must be entered at your extension before using dialling privileges at another extension.
Operation
To use a Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension
other than your own.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring) Access code (default
= 87).
3. Dial your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking TRS COS code (0001-9999)
5. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,
Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).
6. Dial the phone number.
Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS
remains in effect until you replace the
handset.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1-08: Walking Class of Service Code
Considerations
•
•
•
314
The same Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code can be used on more than one extension.
Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.
ARS and TRS (Call Barring) dialling privileges follow the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS.
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Before entering a new Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code, you must first clear the existing
code.
When Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension
number) appears in Call Logging.
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued June 2000
315
Chapter 7. SLT Features
316
Section 700 - Operation
ICX (International) issued June 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Appendix A: SBS/VB-9 A-Series
Telephone Features
In addition to the Key Telephone, DSLT, and SLT, SBS/VB-9 A Series phones may also be used. While most the
features available on the Key Telephone, DSLT, and SLT are also available on the SBS/VB-9 A-Series telephones, there are a few differences. These differences are listed below:
Feature
Differences for SBS/VB-9 A-Series Telephones
Absence Messages
Absence message can be received only on display
telephones.
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes
Attendant Group Calls
Auto Repeat Dial
Background Music
Busy Override
Callback Request
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding - All Call and Do Not Disturb
Call Hold
System Hold
Floating Hold
Exclusive Hold
Brokers Hold
Call Park
Call Hold
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup
Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup
Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
Unsupervised Transfer
Camping a Call onto a Busy Extension
Caller ID Call Log
Not Available
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
Conference Calls
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
317
Section 700 - Operation
Feature
Differences for SBS/VB-9 A-Series Telephones
Directory Numbers
Display Information
7-Segment Display Phones
Small Display Phone
Changing the Display’s Contrast
Not available on A-Series telephones.
Do-Not-Disturb
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
Flash key is not available on A-series phone.
Recall button and A-series telephone (UK only) send
the same Flash signal when the Exchange/MCO key is
pressed while in conversation.
CONF, PROG, and RECALL keys are not available
on A-series phones. These functions are assigned on
FF keys.
A-series key phones do not support this feature.
Flash
Flexible Function Keys
Handsfree Answerback
Handsfree Operation
When the VB-2394 Headset Adapter is connected, the
TW version A-series telephone requires the Headset
Adapter (VB-5331) to switch to the headset mode.
This feature is not available with A-Series key |
telephones.
Headset Operation
Hot Dial Pad
Hot Line
Intercom Calling
Last Number Redial
Line Appearances
DSS/BLF Appearances
Direct In-Line Appearances
Multi-Exchange Line (MCO) Appearances
Not available.
Message Key
Message Waiting/Callback
This feature is available only when using alphanumeric telephones.
Mute Function
Offhook Monitor
Offhook Signaling
Offhook Voice Announce
One-Touch Keys
On-hook Dialing
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
Ringing Line Preferences
Speed Dialing
Personal Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
318
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Feature
Differences for SBS/VB-9 A-Series Telephones
Speed Dial Linking
Speed Dial Name Assignments
This feature is available only when using alphanumeric telephones.
Station Lockout
Step Call (Reset Call)
Timed Reminder Call
Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Trunk (Exchange Line) Key Access
Depends on the key phone, and whether the maximum
exchanges available to assign FF keys are different.
Direct (Exchange Line) Access
MCO Line Preference
MCO Trunk (Exchange Line) Access
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing
Universal Night Answer to Page
A-series telephones have a slide switch. The SBS/VB9 telephone has Volume Up/Down key.
Volume Control
Walking TRS (Call Bearing) Class of Service
Zip Mode
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
319
Section 700 - Operation
320
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
INDEX
Auto Repeat Dial
DSLT 224
Key Telephone 125
Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) 25
Automatic Call Waiting
Camp-on
DSLT 241
Key Telephone 149
SLT 292
Automatic Day/Night Mode 40
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 26
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer
System 27
A
About User Programming 79
Absence Message 120
DSLT 219
Key Telephone 120
Message No. and Text
Key Telephone 121
SLT 271
Absence message
key telephone 120
Absence Messages
Setting 80
Access Codes
MCO Trunk
DSLT 264
Key Telephone 208
SLT 312
Account Codes
DSLT 221
Key Telephone 122
Non-Verified
Key Telephone 123
SLT 273
Non-Verified ID
DSLT 222
SLT 272
Verified ID
DSLT 222
Key Telephone 123
SLT 273
ACD (Automatic Call Distributor) 25
AEC Disconnet 24
Alarm Ringing 63
Alpha Tagging
Caller ID 30
Analog Device Capability
Extension Interface 44
ANSWER Key 164
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail (Third Party)
Architecture
Non-Blocking 58
ARS (Automatic Route Selection) 26
A-Series Telephones 317
Attendant
Attendant Reversion 56
Attendant Group Calls
DSLT 223
Key Telephone 124
SLT 275
Attendant Groups 24
ICX-50-700
B
Background Music
DSLT 225
Key Telephone 126
System 27
Background Music/MOH Separation
System 27
Backup
Battery 27
Memory 49
Battery Backup 27
BGM/MOH Separation 27
Blocking Outgoing Audio
Mute Function 179
Broker’s Hold
DSLT 234
Key Telephone 135
SLT 284
Building Block Expansion Capability 28
Built-In Voice Mail Unit 28
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Delayed Ringing
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Ringing 62
Busy Override
DSLT 225
Key Telephone 127
SLT 275
72
62
C
Call Barring
Toll Restriction Service (TRS) 65
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
Walking TRS Class of Service 214
Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
Setting 81
Call Forward ID Code
Voice Mail (Third Party) 72
ICX (International) issued October 2000
314
321
Index
Section 700 - Operation
Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
Setting 82
Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
Setting 83
Call Forwarding
All Calls
DSLT 227
Key Telephone 129
SLT 277
Busy
DSLT 228
Key Telephone 130
SLT 278
Do-Not-Disturb
DSLT 230
Key Telephone 132
SLT 280
DSLT 227
Key Telephone 129
No Answer
DSLT 229
Key Telephone 131
SLT 279
SLT 277
Call Hold
Broker’s Hold
DSLT 234
Key Telephone 135
SLT 284
Call Park
DSLT 234
Key Telephone 136
SLT 284
DSLT 231
Exclusive Hold
DSLT 233
Key Telephone 135
SLT 283
Floating Hold
DSLT 232
Key Telephone 134
SLT 282
Key Telephone 133
SLT 281
System Hold
DSLT 231
Key Telephone 133
SLT 281
Call Logging
Output Format 64
SMDR 63
Priority of Incoming Call Condition Codes 64
Priority of Outgoing Call Condition Codes 63
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 63
322
Call Park
DSLT 234
Key Telephone 136
SLT 284
Call Pickup
DSLT 236
Extension Direct Pickup
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 140
SLT 287
Extension Group Pickup
DSLT 236
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
Trunk Direct Pickup
DSLT 238
Key Telephone 141
Trunk Group Pickup
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 140
SLT 288
Call Progress Tones 29
Call Records
SMDR 63
Call Routing
Network 56
Call Transfer
DSLT 239
Key Telephone 142
Network 56
SLT 289
Supervised
DSLT 239
Key Telephone 142
SLT 289
Unsupervised
DSLT 239
Key Telephone 143
SLT 290
Call Waiting
(Automatic) Camp-on
DSLT 241
Key Telephone 149
SLT 292
(Manual) Camp-on
DSLT 241
Key Telephone 149
SLT 292
Camp-on
DSLT 241
Key Telephone 149
SLT 291
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
Callback
Message Key 177
Message Waiting
DSLT 248
Key Telephone 178
SLT 298
Callback Request
DSLT 226
Key Telephone 128
SLT 276
Caller ID
Call Log
Key Telephone 144
Setting Logging Extensions 84
Caller ID Alpha Tagging 30
Caller ID Call Log
Key Telephone 144
Caller ID Logging Extensions
Setting 84
Calling
Network Extension 56, 57
Camping on Busy Extension
Call Transfer
DSLT 240
Key Telephone 143
SLT 291
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
Automatic
DSLT 241
Key Telephone 149
SLT 292
DSLT 241
Key Telephone 149
Manual
DSLT 241
Key Telephone 149
SLT 292
SLT 291
Centrex/PBX Compatibility 31
Changing Display Contrast
Display Information 159
Circular Hunt Group 47
Class of Service
Walking TRS
DSLT 266
Walking TRS (Call Barring)
Key Telephone 214
SLT 314
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction 32
Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers 35
Class of Service - Extension Feature 33
Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction 35
Class of Service - Trunk/Tie 32
Class of Service (COS) 31
ICX-50-700
CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code (Third Party)
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN PRI 68
Compatibility
Centrex/PBX 31
Conference Calls
Busy Override
DSLT 225
Key Telephone 127
SLT 275
DSLT 242
Key Telephone 151
SLT 293
Connection
Tandem 58
Console
DSS/72 161
EM/24 162
COS
Extension
Enable/Disable Features 33
Trunk
Enable/Disable Features 32
COS - Ext/Ext Restriction 32
COS - Extension (Station) Timers 35
COS - Extension Feature 33
COS - Trunk to Trunk Restriction 35
COS - Trunk/Tie 32
COS (Class of Service) 31
Customizing Tool 60
73
D
Data Security 36
Date
Setting 107
Day
Setting 107
Day Mode
Automatic 40
Day, Day 2 37
Manual 37
Day of Week Mode
Addresses 87
Setting 85
Day Ringing 61
Day/Night Mode
Automatic 40
Manual 37
Day/Night System Mode
System 36
DDI Trunk Interface 67
Delayed Ringing 61
Devices
ICX (International) issued October 2000
323
Index
Section 700 - Operation
Programming 59
Dial Pad
Hot
Key Telephone 171
Dialling
Onhook
DSLT 251
Key Telephone 185
Digital Key Line Telephone (DSLT) Features
Attendant Group Calls 223
Digital Key Telephones
Extension Interface 43
Digital Pad 40
Digital Pad Class 40
Digital Single Line Telehphone (DSLT) Features
Conference Calls 242
Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT) 219
Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT) Features
Absence Message 219
Account Codes 221
Auto Repeat Dial 224
Background Music 225
Busy Override 225
Call Forwarding 227
Call Hold 231
Call Pickup 236
Call Transfer 239
Callback Request 226
Camp-on (Call Waiting) 241
Do-Not-Distrub (DND) 244
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion 245
Flash Signal 246
Hot Line 246
Intercom Calling 247
Last Number Redial 247
Message Waiting/Callback 248
Offhook Signalling 249
Offhook Voice Announce 250
Onhook Dialling 251
Paging
Meet-Me Answer 251
Speed Dialling 255
Step Call (Reset Call) 261
Timed Reminder 262
Trunk Access 263
Trunk Queuing 265
Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page 265
Walking TRS Class of Service 266
DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement 70
DIL Ringing
Distinguishing Between Incoming Calls 69
Direct Dial Inward (DDI) (DID) Day/Night Ringing 61
Direct Dial Inward (DDI) (DID) Delayed Ringing 62
Direct Dial Inward (DDI) Ringing
324
Ringing Types 68
Direct In Line Appearances 175
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
System 41
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ringing
Ringing Types 69
Direct Line (DL) Ringing
Ringing Types
DL 69
Direct Trunk Access
DSLT 263
Key Telephone 207
SLT 311
Directory Numbers
Key Telephone 153
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) 41
Disconnect Signal
Voice Mail (Third Party) 74
Display Information
Changing Display Contrast 159
Key Telephone 157
Large-Display Phone 158
Small-Display Phone 159
Distinctive Ringing 42
Distributed Hunt Group 46
DND (Do-Not-Disturb)
DSLT 244
Key Telephone 159
SLT 294
Do-Not-Distrub (DND)
DSLT 244
Key Telephone 159
Do-Not-Disturb
Call Forwarding
DSLT 230
Key Telephone 132
SLT 280
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
SLT 294
Door box
Doorphone 42
Doorphone 42
Doorphone Sensor 43
DP
Signal Conversion
DSLT 245
Key Telephone 161
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
DSLT 245
Key Telephone 161
DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs)
Extension Interface 44
DSLT (Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT)
Illustration 219
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
DSLT Features 217
DSS/72 Console 161
DSS/BLF Appearances 174
DTMF
Signal Conversion
DSLT 245
Key Telephone 161
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface 44
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface 45
Extension Name Assignment
Large-Display Phone Example 51
Small-Display Phone Example 52
Extension Name Assignments 50
Extension Names
Setting 89
Extension Restriction COS 32
Extension Timers 35
E
EM/24 Console 162
Exception Day Mode
Setting 87
Exclusive Hold
DSLT 233
Key Telephone 135
SLT 283
Expansion Capability 28
Extension
Set Call Forward Busy Destination 81
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination 83
Extension (Station) Timers
Class Assignment 35
Extension Calling 56, 57
Extension COS
Enable/Disable Features 33
Extension Direct Pickup
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 140
SLT 287
Extension Feature COS 33
Extension Group Pickup
All Calls
DSLT 236
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
DSLT 236
External Calls
DSLT 236
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
Specified Group Pickup
DSLT 236
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
Extension Inferface
Analog Device Capability 44
DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs) 44
Extension Interface 43
Digital Key Telephones
System 43
ICX-50-700
F
Facilities
Network 56
Feature Access Codes
FF Key Assignment 165
FF Key Assignment
Feature Access Codes 165
FF Key Extender
DSS/72 161
EM/24 162
FF Keys 163
Flash Send
SLT 295
Flash Signal
DSLT 246
Key Telephone 162
Flash Transfer
Network 57
Flexible Function Keys 163
Flexible Numbering Plan 45
Flexible Slot
Free Slot 46
Floating Hold
DSLT 232
Key Telephone 134
SLT 282
Virtual 71
Forwarding
All Calls
DSLT 227
Key Telephone 129
SLT 277
Busy
DSLT 228
Key Telephone 130
SLT 278
Do-Not-Disturb
DSLT 230
Key Telephone 132
SLT 280
DSLT 227
ICX (International) issued October 2000
325
Index
Key Telephone 129
No Answer
DSLT 229
Key Telephone 131
SLT 279
SLT 277
Free Slot 46
Section 700 - Operation
Groups
Hunt Group
Circular 47
Next Extension 47
Pilot Distributed 46
Pilot Terminal 46
Switch Back 47
Hunting 46
MCO Tenant Group 48
SLT 282
Internal Hold Tone 48
Music 49
Network 57
System Hold
DSLT 231
Key Telephone 133
SLT 281
Hot Dial Pad
Key Telephone 171
Hot Line
DSLT 246
Key Telephone 172
Hunt Group
Circular 47
Next Extension 47
Pilot Distributed 46
Pilot Terminal 46
Switch Back 47
Hunting Groups 46
H
I
Handset
Mute Function 179
Handsfree
Answerback
Key Telephone 169
Operation
Key Telephone 170
Handsfree Answerback
Key Telephone 169
Handsfree Operation
Key Telephone 170
Headset
Operation
Key Telephone 170
Headset Operation
Key Telephone 170
High Priority Message Waiting
Voice Mail (Third Party) 74
Hold
Broker’s Hold
DSLT 234
Key Telephone 135
SLT 284
Exclusive Hold
DSLT 233
Key Telephone 135
SLT 283
Floating Hold
DSLT 232
Key Telephone 134
ID Codes
Setting 82
Intercom Calling
DSLT 247
Key Telephone 172
SLT 296
Tone Calling
DSLT 247
Key Telephone 172
SLT 296
Voice Calling
DSLT 247
Key Telephone 172
SLT 296
Interface
Extension 43
ISDN/BRI 44
ISDN/PRI 45
Trunk 67
Internal Hold Tone
System 48
ISDN Lines
QSIG 60
ISDN PRI Trunk Interface 68
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface
Extension Interface 44
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface
Extension Interface 45
G
326
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
J
JTrunk Ringing Mode
Delayed Ringing 61
K
Key
ANSWER 164, 165
Voice Mail (Third Party) Transfer Key
Key Telephone
Illustration 120
Key Telephone Features 117
Absence Message 120
Account Codes 122
Attendant Group Calls 124
Auto Repeat Dial 125
Background Music 126
Busy Override 127
Call Forwarding 129
Call Hold 133
Call Pickup 139
Call Transfer 142
Callback Request 128
Caller ID Call Log 144
Camp-on (Call Waiting) 149
Conference Calls 151
Directory Numbers 153
Display Information 157
Do-Not-Distrub (DND) 159
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion 161
FF Keys 163
Flash Signal 162
Handsfree Answerback 169
Handsfree Operation 170
Headset Operation 170
Hot Dial Pad 171
Hot Line 172
Intercom Calling 172
Last Number Redial 173
Line Appearances 174
Message Key 177
Message Waiting/Callback 178
Mute Function 179
Offhook Monitor 180
Offhook Signalling 180
Offhook Voice Announce 181
One-Touch Keys 184
Onhook Dialling 185
Paging
Meet-Me Answer 186
Reset Call (Step Call) 204
ICX-50-700
75
Ringing Line Preference 188
Speed Dialling 192
Station Lockout 202
Step Call (Reset Call) 204
Timed Reminder Call 205
Trunk Access 206
Trunk Queuing 209
Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page 210
Variable Mode 210
Voice Recognition 212
Volume Control 213
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service 214
Zip Mode 215
Key telephone features
absence message 120
L
Large-Display Phone
Display Information 158
Example
Assigning Extension Names 51
Setting PSD Names 95
Main Menu Example 158
Last Number Redial
DSLT 247
Key Telephone 173
SLT 297
Line Appearances
Direct In Line Appearances 175
DSS/BLF Appearances 174
Key Telephone 174
Multi-CO (MCO) 176
List of features 15
Loop Start Trunk Interface 68
M
Maintenance
Power On 59
User 77
Manual Call Waiting
Camp-on
DSLT 241
Key Telephone 149
SLT 292
Manual Day/Night Mode 37
MCO Line Preference
Trunk Access 207
MCO Tenant Group 48
MCO Trunk Access
DSLT 264
ICX (International) issued October 2000
327
Index
Section 700 - Operation
Key Telephone 208
SLT 311
MCO Trunk Access Codes
DSLT 264
Key Telephone 208
SLT 312
Meet-Me Answer
Paging
DSLT 251
Key Telephone 186
SLT 301
Memory Backup 49
Message Key
Message Wait Callback 177
Priorty Message Wait Callback 177
Setting ID Code 90
Message Key ID Code
Setting 90
Voice Mail (Third Party) 73, 74
Message Keys
Key Telephone 177
Message Wait Callback
Message Key 177
Message Waiting
High Priority
Voice Mail (Third Party) 74
Message Waiting/Callback
DSLT 248
Key Telephone 178
SLT 298
Messages
Absence
DSLT 219
Key Telephone 120
SLT 271
Absence Message
Message No. and Text
Day/Night System 36
Exception Day
Setting 87
Manual Day/Night 37
Night, Night 1, Night 2 37
Special Day
Setting 100
Start Time/Mode - Addresses/Values
MOH 27
Internal Hold Tone 48
MOH (Music-on-Hold) 49
Multi-CO (MCO) Appearances 176
Multiple Ringing
Ringing Types 71
Music
Background
DSLT 225
Key Telephone 126
Music-on-Hold (Background)
DSLT 225
Key Telephone 126
Music-on-Hold (MOH) 49
Internal Hold Tone 48
Mute Function
Key Telephone 179
N
Key Telephone 121
Setting
Absence Messages 80
Setting Send Text Messages 99
Setting Text Message Replies 112
Text Message
Replies 149
Send 149
Mode Schedule
Schedule Patterns - Addresses/Values
Setting 91
Modes
Automatic Day/Night 40
Day of Week
Addresses 87
Setting 85
Day, Day 2 37
328
102
93
Name Assignments 50
Extension 50
Speed Dial 54, 197
Names
Extension 89
Network 56, 57
Network Attendant Reversion 56
Network Call Routing 56
Network Call Transfer 56
Network Extension Calling 56, 57
Network Facilities 56
Attendant Reversion 56
Network Call Routing 56
Network Call Transfer 56
Network Extension Calling 56, 57
Network Flash Transfer 57
Network Hold 57
Network Paging 57
Network Transfer Recall 58
Tandem Connection 58
Network Flash Transfer 57
Network Hold 57
Network Paging 57
Network Transfer Recall 58
Next Extension/Hunt Group 47
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Night Mode
Automatic 40
Manual 37
Night, Night 2, Night 3 37
Non-Blocking Architecture 58
Non-Verified Account Codes
Key Telephone 123
SLT 273
Non-Verified ID Account Codes
DSLT 222
Numbering Plan
Flexible 45
O
Offhook
Monitor
Key Telephone 180
Signalling
DSLT 249
Key Telephone 180
SLT 299
Voice Announce
DSLT 250
Key Telephone 181
SLT 300
Offhook Monitor
Key Telephone 180
Offhook Signalling
DSLT 249
Key Telephone 180
SLT 299
Offhook Voice Announce
DSLT 250
Key Telephone 181
SLT 300
One-Touch Keys 184
Onhook Dialling
DSLT 251
Key Telephone 185
Override
SSD TRS 65
P
Pad
Digital 40
Pad Class 40
Paging
DSLT 251
Key Telephone 186
Meet-Me Answer
ICX-50-700
Index
DSLT 251
Key Telephone 186
SLT 301
Network 57
SLT 301
PBX Compatability 31
PC-Based Customizing Tool 60
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
Setting Names 93
Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Numbers
Setting 98
Personal Speed Dialling (PSD)
DSLT 255
Key Telephone 192
SLT 304
Pickup
DSLT 236
Extension Direct Pickup
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 140
SLT 287
Extension Group Pickup
All Calls
DSLT 236
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
DSLT 236
External Calls
DSLT 236
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
Specific Group
DSLT 236
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
Key Telephone 139
SLT 286
Trunk Direct Pickup
DSLT 238
Key Telephone 141
Trunk Group Pickup
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 140
SLT 288
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group 46
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group 46
Port
Virtual 71
Power Failure Transfer 58
Power On Maintenance 59
ICX (International) issued October 2000
329
Index
Priority Message Wait Callback
Message Key 177
Programing Devices
Telephone 59
Programming Devices 59
PC-Based Customizing Tool 60
Programming Telephone 59
Progress Tones 29
PSD (Personal Speed Dial)
Setting Names 93
Large-Display Phone Example 95
Small-Display Phone Example 96
Setting Numbers 98
Q
QSIG ISDN Lines 60
R
Redial
Last Number
DSLT 247
Key Telephone 173
SLT 297
Redial Key
Busy Tone
DSLT 224
Key Telephone 125
Last Number
DSLT 247
Key Telephone 173
RELEASE Key 165
Reset Call (Step Call)
DSLT 261
Key Telephone 204
SLT 309
Restriction
Ext to Ext COS 32
Ringing
Alarm 63
BLF 62
BLF Delayed 62
Day 61
DDI 68
DDI (DID) Day/Night 61
DDI (DID) Delayed 62
Delayed 61
DISA 69
Distinctive 42
DL 69
Slide 62
330
Section 700 - Operation
Ringing Line Preference 188
Ringing Modes 60
Ringing Types 68
DDI Ringing 68
DISA 69
Multiple Ringing 71
Room monitoring using Key Telephone 188,
Room monitoring using SLT 302
252
S
SBS Telephones 317
Schedule
Setting 91
Security
Data 36
Send Text Messages
Setting 99
Sensor
Doorphone 43
Separation
BGM/MOH 27
Set Absence Messages 80
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension 81
Set Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail 82
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension 83
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions 84
Set Day of Week Mode 85
Set Exception Day Mode 87
Set Extension Names 89
Set Message Key ID Code 90
Set Mode Schedule 91
Set Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Names 93
Large-Display Phone Example 95
Small-Display Phone Example 96
Set Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Numbers 98
Set Send Text Messages 99
Set Special Day Mode 100
Set System Date/Time/Day 107
Set System Speed Dial (SSD) Index 108
Set System Speed Dial (SSD) Names 109
Set System Speed Dial (SSD) Numbers 111
Set Text Message Replies 112
Set Verified ID Codes 113
Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes 115
Signal Conversion
DP to DTMF
DSLT 245
Key Telephone 161
Silent Monitor 190
Single Line Telephone (SLT) Features 269
Absence Message 271
Account Codes 272
ICX (International) issued October 2000
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
Attendant Group Calls 275
Busy Override 275
Call Forwarding 277
Call Pickup 286
Call Transfer 289
Callback Request 276
Camp-on (Call Waiting) 291
Conference Calls 293
Do-Not-Distrub (DND) 294
Flash Send 295
Intercom Calling 296
Last Number Redial 297
Message Waiting/Callback 298
Offhook Signalling 299
Offhook Voice Announce 300
Paging
Meet-Me Answer 301
Speed Dialling 303
Station Lockout 307
Step Call (Reset Call) 309
Timed Reminder 309
Trunk Access 310
Trunk Queuing 312
Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page 313
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service 314
Single Line Telephone (SLT)Features
Call Hold 281
Slide Ringing 62
SLT Flash Send 295
Small-Display Phone
Display Information 159
Example
Assigning Extension Names 52
Setting PSD Names 96
Menu Example 159
SMDR (Call Logging)
Output data format 64
Priority of Incoming Call Condition Codes 64
Priority of Outgoing Call Condition Codes 63
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Call Logging 63
Call Records 63
Software Version 11
Special Day Mode
Setting 100
Start Time/Mode - Addresses/Values 102
Speed Dial Linking
DSLT 258
Key Telephone 196
SLT 306
Speed Dial Name Assignments 54, 197
Speed Dialing
DSLT 255
Speed Dialling
ICX-50-700
DSLT 255
Key Telephone 192
Personal
DSLT 255
Key Telephone 192
SLT 304
SLT 303
System
DSLT 257
Key Telephone 194
SLT 305
S-Point Interface
ISDN/BRI 44
ISDN/PRI 45
SSD (System Speed Dial)
Setting Names 109
Setting Numbers 111
Setting SSD Index 108
SSD TRS Override 65
Station Lockout
Key Telephone 202
SLT 307
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Call Logging 63
Call Records 63
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging
Output Format 64
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging)
Priority of Incoming Call Condition Codes 64
Priority of Outgoing Call Condition Codes 63
Station Timers 35
Class Assignment 35
Step Call (Reset Call)
DSLT 261
Key Telephone 204
SLT 309
Supervised Call Transfer
DSLT 239
Key Telephone 142
SLT 289
Switch Back Hunt Group 47
System
Background Music 27
System Architecture
Non-Blocking 58
System Features 21
System Hold
DSLT 231
Key Telephone 133
SLT 281
System Mode
Day 37
ICX (International) issued October 2000
331
Index
Section 700 - Operation
Day/Night 36
Night 37
System Speed Dial (SSD)
Setting Names 109
Setting Numbers 111
Setting SSD Index 108
TRS Override 65
System Speed Dialling (SSD)
DSLT 257
Key Telephone 194
SLT 305
T
Tandem Connection 58
Telephone Programming 59
Tenant Group
MCO 48
Tenant Operation
MCO 48
Text Message Replies
Setting 112
Text Messages
Replies 149
Send 149
Setting Replies 112
Setting Send Text Messages 99
Third Party Voice Mail 72
Time
Setting 107
Timed Reminder Call
DSLT 262
Key Telephone 205
SLT 309
Timers
Station 35
Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring)
Tone
Internal Hold 48
Tone Calling
Intercom Calling
DSLT 247
Key Telephone 172
SLT 296
Tones
Call Progress 29
Transfer
Automatic Trunk To Trunk 27
Camping on Busy Extension
DSLT 240
Key Telephone 143
SLT 291
DSLT 239
332
65
Key Telephone 142
Network Call 56
Network Flash 57
Power Failure 58
SLT 289
Supervised
DSLT 239
Key Telephone 142
SLT 289
Unsupervised
DSLT 239
Key Telephone 143
SLT 290
Transfer Key
Voice Mail (Third Party) 75
Transfer Recall
Network 58
TRS (Call Barring) Codes
Walking 115
TRS (Toll Restriction Service)
Call Barring 65
TRS Override
SSD 65
Trunk (Exchange Line) Key Trunk Access 206
Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing 319
Trunk Access
CTrunk (Exchange Line) Key Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
DSLT 263
Key Telephone 207
SLT 311
DSLT 263
Key Telephone 206
MCO
DSLT 264
Key Telephone 208
SLT 311
MCO Line Preference 207
SLT 310
Trunk COS
Enable/Disable Features 32
Trunk Direct Pickup
DSLT 238
Key Telephone 141
Trunk Group Pickup
DSLT 237
Key Telephone 140
SLT 288
Trunk Interface 67
DDI 67
Loop Start 68
Trunk Interface - DDI 67
Trunk Interface - ISDN PRI 68
Trunk Interface - Loop Start 68
ICX (International) issued October 2000
206
ICX-50-700
Section 700 - Operation
Trunk Queuing
DSLT 265
Key Telephone 209
SLT 312
Trunk Ringing
DDI (DID) Day/Night 61
Ringing Modes 60
Trunk Ringing Mode
Alarm Ringing 63
BLF Delayed Ringing 62
BLF Ringing 62
Day Ringing 61
DDI (DID) Delayed Ringing 62
Slide Ringing 62
Trunk to Trunk Restriction COS 35
Trunk To Trunk Transfer
Automatic 27
Trunk/Tie COS 32
U
UNA to Page
DSLT 265
Key Telephone 210
SLT 313
Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page
DSLT 265
Key Telephone 210
SLT 313
Unsupervised Call Transfer
DSLT 239
Key Telephone 143
SLT 290
User Maintenance 77
Introduction 77
User Programming 79
Index
Intercom Calling
DSLT 247
Key Telephone 172
SLT 296
Voice Mail
Built-In Voice Mail Unit 28
Call Forward ID Code (Third Party) 72
Voice Mail (Third Party)
Answer Supervision 72
CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code 73
Disconnect Signal 74
High Priority Message Waiting 74
Message Key ID Code 74
Voice Mail (Third Party) Transfer Key 75
Voice Mail ID Codes
Setting 82
Voice Mail Integration
Third Party 72
Voice Recognition 212
Volume Control 213
W
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service
Key Telephone 214
SLT 314
Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes
Setting 115
Walking TRS Class of Service
DSLT 266
Z
Zip Mode
215
V
Variable Mode 210
VB-9 Telephones 317
Verified ID Account Codes 222
Key Telephone 123
SLT 273
Verified ID Codes
Setting 113
Virtual Extension
Virtual Port 71
Virtual Port 71
Floating Hold 71
Virtual Extension 71
Voice Calling
ICX-50-700
ICX (International) issued October 2000
333
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement